Documents - Document preparation for researchers using LaTeX

LaTex:
Document preparation
1
2
Introduction
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1
1
1
1
Exercises
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
3
4
Course background
Course aims and content
This document
Getting started
Before you start
Texmaker
LATEX
2.3.1 Compiling LATEX files
2.3.2 Viewing LATEX files
Introductory Exercises
2.4.1 A simple example
2.4.2 A longer document
Typesetting Text
Typesetting Mathematics
2.7.1 Cross references
2.7.2 Including pictures
2.7.3 Bibliographies
3
3
3
4
5
6
6
7
7
7
8
10
12
12
12
13
15
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
15
15
15
16
16
Special Characters
Dashes and Hyphens
Quotation Marks
Accents and Special Characters
List of Mathematical Symbols
23
4.1
32
Acknowledgements
References
33
Not So Short Introduction
33
Slides
204
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1
Course background
LATEX is a document preparation system that produces far better-looking output than any word processor.
LATEX is ideal for producing well-structured documents particularly those containing scientific formulae,
mathematical proofs or computer programs, without getting bogged down in design.
1.2
Course aims and content
The course provides an introduction to LATEX using Texmaker. The following topics are covered.
•
•
•
•
•
•
1.3
A brief history of LATEX.
Creating a simple LATEX document.
Lists and tables.
Typesetting mathematical equations.
Using cross–references, including images, and creating bibliographies.
This document
The document contains all the information you will need to get you started using LATEX.
•
•
•
•
•
1.4
Exercises.
Typesetting special characters or Helpful Hints.
The Not So Short Introduction to LATEX – a widely used guide.
The slides.
Getting started
Begin by reading Chapter 2 for instructions on how to get started.
1
Chapter 2
Exercises
2.1
Before you start
These exercises aim to illustrate particular features of LATEX. They start very gradually by asking you to
create and view a simple document and then move on to more complex examples. If at any time you can’t
work out how to produce a particular effect then do consult the answers in Chapter 4 on page 23 or ask.
Later in the exercises we will look at producing documents containing mathematics and graphs, creating
cross-references, and making a bibliography.
2.2
Texmaker
We will be using Texmaker to create, edit, compile and view LATEX files. To start Texmaker go to Start I
All Programs I Texmaker. A window like Figure 2.1 should appear.
Figure 2.1: Texmaker: Start–up screen
3
CHAPTER 2. EXERCISES2.2. TEXMAKER
If your screen does not look exactly like this window then look at the View menu and make sure that these
items are checked:
• Structure
• Messages / Log File
• PDF Viewer
• List of opened files
Once Texmaker is correct, find the Run (F6) drop down menu box to the right of PDFLaTeX. See what
other options there are.
Find the following buttons:
•
•
•
•
View PDF (F7)
Find (Ctrl+F)
Replace (Ctrl+R)
Save (Ctrl+S)
The keyboard shortcuts are included after each command.
These buttons are used for building and viewing LATEX documents. Most of the other buttons are used for
particular LATEX commands. See if you can find some of these:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bold
Italic
Left
Part/Chapter/Section
Relation symbols
Greek Letters
Have a look at the View menu to open different Texmaker screens. Make sure that
• Messages / Log files
• List of opened files
are both checked.
Now you have explored the Texmaker it is time to start using LATEX.
2.2.1
http://www.stats.ox.ac.uk/pub/susan/oucs_latex/ and save the four files
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
sample.tex
panic.png
panic.eps
test.bib
in your home folder. To be really organised you could create a new folder to keep them in. This booklet
can also be downloaded if you want to see an online version of the exercises.
2017-02-06 22:05
4
Rev: 352
CHAPTER 2. EXERCISES2.3. LATEX
2.3
LATEX
Go to File I Open. . . and open sample.tex. You should see a screen like Figure 2.2. Note that some of
Figure 2.2: Texmaker: Opening an example file.
the text on the screen (not on this printed page!) is highlighted in different colours which helps you to find
errors quickly.
Let’s look at some of the significant lines in the sample.tex file.
\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article}
All LATEX files begin with a \documentclass declaration. The two options contained in [. . . ] specify the
default font size (12pt) and paper size (a4paper). The final statement
{article}
describes the document’s class. Conventionally the article class is used for shorter documents and the
report class for longer dissertations. Other options include book and letter. Note that everything that
appears on a line after a % is a comment and is ignored.
The syntax of LATEX commands is consistent — a command begins with a \ (a backslash), is altered
by options contained in [. . . ] (square brackets) and is defined by what’s contained within {. . . } (curly
brackets). See for example the first line of the sample.tex file:
\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article}
The main body of a document – that is the information that you want people to read – begins with
\begin{document}
and is always ended by
\end{document}
The information has been divided into sections with the commands
\section{Simple Text}
and
\subsection{A Warning or Two}
When the file is compiled these sections and subsections will be numbered automatically. Various formatting commands are embedded within the text. For example \emph is used to italicise text and \textbf for
bold text.
Rev: 352
5
2017-02-06 22:05
CHAPTER 2. EXERCISES2.3. LATEX
2.3.1
Compiling LATEX files
Figure 2.3: A successful LATEX compilation
Once you have a finished editing your file it should saved and be compiled. To compile your file click on
the blue arrow by PDFLaTeX . See Figure 2.3 for an example.
A small digression on debugging. When LATEX finds errors it shows a line number near where it thinks the
error has has been found. If you look at the bottom of the Texmaker screen window, a block of red text
will appear, with an error message and a line number. If you click on this text, then you should be taken to
the location of the error in the edit window.
2.3.2
Viewing LATEX files
To look at the compiled version of the file click on the blue arrow next to View PDF . A new window
should open which looks similar to Figure 2.4. It should show a formatted version of the file.
Figure 2.4: The preview window
Alternatively Quick Build will both compile your .tex file and preview it as long as you have done one
PDFLaTeX first.
2017-02-06 22:05
6
Rev: 352
CHAPTER 2. EXERCISES2.4. INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES
2.4
Introductory Exercises
The following exercises are designed to show many features of LATEX.
2.4.1
A simple example
. Exercise 1
enter these lines
We are now going to input, compile and view a simple LATEX file. Use File I New. . .$$and$$\documentclass{article}
\begin{document}
\section{Introduction}
Hello there.
Goodbye now.
\end{document}
in the editing window. Use the File I Save As. . . menu to save the file as new.tex. It is very important
that the file has a .tex suffix.
To use the auto-completion in Texmaker use the TAB key.
Click on the blue arrow to the left of
version of the file.
PDFLaTex to build the file, or use F6. You should see a compiled
Now change the file so that it contains a mistake – perhaps by replacing ‘section’ by ‘sektion’ or leaving
out the closing } after \begin{document. Now compile the file again and see what happens. Depending
on the error you have introduced you may see something like this:
! Undefined control sequence.
l.3 \sektion
{Introduction}
or like this:
Runaway argument?
{document Hello there.
! Paragraph ended before \begin was complete.
\par
l.4
Can you see the red text in the lower window? This shows that there is an error. Clicking on the error
should take you to the place in the edit window where the error was found.
2.4.2
A longer document
This exercise uses the sample .tex file which you will have downloaded.
. Exercise 2
Open the sample.tex file in Texmaker and then compile and view the file.
Now we are going to make some changes this file. Remember that you will need to save the file$$and$$compile each time you make changes.
Rev: 352
7
2017-02-06 22:05
CHAPTER 2. EXERCISES2.5. TYPESETTING TEXT
Figure 2.5: Texmaker: Locating errors
1. Change documentclass from article to report and then to book. You might want to include
\chapter{Introduction} immediately after \begin{document}
2. Change the documentclass font size option from 12pt to 11pt .
3. Add \usepackage{parskip} to the preamble. How does the paragraph formatting change?
4. Add \usepackage{times} to the preamble. The font should now look different.
5. Change the text colour from red to green. Remember that if you will need to include \usepackage{color}
in the preamble if it is not already there.
6. Swap the emphasised and bold text.
2.5
Typesetting Text
. Exercise 3 We will now typeset some simple sentences. You should have a copy of The Not So Short
Introduction to LATEX2e which we will be using for reference for the rest of these exercises. See Chapter 2
Look at Chapter 3 Helpful Hints on page 15, it contains instructions on how to typeset many characters
used in the exercises below.
Start a new section in your document. Typeset the following.
I entered the room and—horrors—I saw both my father-in-law and my mother-in-law.
The winter of 1484–1485 was one of discontent.
Look carefully at the lengths of the hyphens and dashes in these examples. Make sure your answers look
the same.
Frank wondered, “Is this a girl that can’t say ‘No!’?”
Look carefully at the quotation marks in this example. Make sure your answers look the same.
Does Æschylus understand Œdipus?
2017-02-06 22:05
8
Rev: 352
CHAPTER 2. EXERCISES2.5. TYPESETTING TEXT
As a general rule a space is needed after a LATEX command if it starts with a letter (A-Z or a-z). A space is
not needed if the command is a single punctuation mark.
They took some honey and plenty of money wrapped up in a £5 note.
The command for a pounds sign is \pounds followed by a space.
Élèves, refusez vos leçons! Jetez vos chaînes!
Can you take a ferry from Öland to Åland?
. Exercise 4
Give your document a title. You will need to include
\date{A date}
in the preamble – that is before \begin{document} and then
\maketitle
Note that you will need to rerun latex sample.tex twice in order for entries in the table of contents to be
displayed.
. Exercise 5
Lists. Using the itemize , enumerate and description environments typeset the following
1. You can mix list environments as much as you like
• But it might start to look silly
- With different symbols
2. So do remember
Stupid things will not become smart because they are in a list.
Smart things, though, can be presented beautifully in a list.
. Exercise 6
Typeset the following two tables.
Vegetable Production
. Exercise 7
Vegetable
Weight
Carrots
Lettuce
French beans
Good early crop, then carrot fly.
Slow to start, then bolted.
Excellent.
7kg
1kg
12kg
If you have time, try this more complicated table.
Currencies 1 Jan 2001
Rev: 352
London:
New York:
£: $1.8672 £: DM 2.8369 £: FFr 9.69080 £:$ 1.8655
$: DM 1.5175$: FFr 5.1845
9
2017-02-06 22:05
CHAPTER 2. EXERCISES2.6. TYPESETTING MATHEMATICS
2.6
Typesetting Mathematics
If you will be needing to typeset mathematical formulae then try as many of these exercises as possible.
Answers can be found in Chapter 4 on page 23.
. Exercise 8
. Exercise 9
text.
Typeset the following: C(n, r) = n!/(r! (n − r)!). Note the spacing in the denominator.
Typeset the equation a + b = c − d = xy = w/z as in-line and displayed mathematical
. Exercise 10
. Exercise 11
. Exercise 12
. Exercise 13
. Exercise 14
. Exercise 15
. Exercise 16
. Exercise 17
. Exercise 18
Typeset the equation (f g)0 = f 0 g + f g 0 as in-line and displayed mathematical text.
. Exercise 19
Typeset: What are the points where
∂
∂x f (x, y)
. Exercise 20
Typeset each of the following: ex
e−x
. Exercise 21
Typeset: ∇2 f (x, y) =
. Exercise 22
. Exercise 23
. Exercise 24
Typeset the following expression: limx→0 (1 + x) x = e.
Typeset αβ = γ + δ as in-line and displayed mathematical text.
Typeset Γ(n) = (n − 1)! as in-line and displayed mathematical text.
Typeset: x ∧ (y ∨ z) = (x ∧ y) ∨ (x ∧ z).
Typeset: 2 + 4 + 6 + · · · + 2n = n(n + 1).
Typeset: ~x · ~y = 0 if and only if ~x ⊥ ~y .
Typeset: ~x · ~y 6= 0 if and only if ~x 6⊥ ~y .
Typeset: (∀x ∈ R)(∃y ∈ R) such that y > x.
Typeset the following:
a+b
c
∂2f
∂x2
a
b+c
+
1
a+b+c
6=
1
a
+
=
1
b
+ 1c .
∂
∂y f (x, y)
eiπ + 1 = 0 x0
= 0?
x20
x0 2
x
2x .
∂2f
.
∂y 2
1
Typeset: The cardinality of (−∞, ∞) is ℵ1 .
Typeset: limx→0+ xx = 1.
Rx
Rx
Here is a hint to make integrals look a little nicer: look at the difference between 0 f (t)dt and 0 f (t) dt.
In the second case there is a little extra space after f (t), and it looks nicer; \, was used to add the additional
space.
R
. Exercise 25 Typeset the following integral: 01 3x2 dx = 1.
q
√
√
√
3
x.
. Exercise 26 Typeset the following: 2 x+y
10
e
x−y
. Exercise 27
. Exercise 28
Typeset: kxk =
Typeset: φ(t) =
2017-02-06 22:05
√
x · x.
Rt
1
√
2π
0
e−x
2 /2
dx.
10
Rev: 352
CHAPTER 2. EXERCISES2.6. TYPESETTING MATHEMATICS
. Exercise 29
. Exercise 30
. Exercise 31
. Exercise 32
. Exercise 33
Typeset the following: x
Typeset bxc ≤ dxe .
y
x + y.
cos(2θ) = 2 cos2 θ − 1.
Typeset: sin(2θ) = 2 sin θ cos θ
Typeset:
Z
csc2 x dx = − cot x + C
sin α
=1
α→0 α
lim
Typeset:
tan(2θ) =
. Exercise 34
sin α
= 0.
α→∞ α
lim
Typeset:
2 tan θ
.
1 − tan2 θ

aa · · ·
 .. . .
 .
.
za · · ·
. Exercise 35
Typeset:
A random variable Y has density
f (y; θ, φ) = exp

az
.. 
. 
zz
yθ − b(θ)
+ c(y; φ)
aφ
and its moment-generating function is M (t) = exp[{b(θ + taφ) − b(θ)}/(aφ)].
. Exercise 36
X
r,c
Typeset: If Yrc , r = 1, . . . , R, c = 1, . . . , C are random variables, show that
X
X
X
(Yrc − Y .. )2 =
(Y r. − Y .. )2 +
(Y .c − Y .. )2 +
(Yrc − Y .c − Y r. + Y .. )2 .
. Exercise 37
r,c
r,c
(2.1)
r,c
Typeset:
f (yi | λi , ψ) = λi ψe−λi ψyi ,
f (xi | λi ) = λi e−λi xi ,
. Exercise 38
Typeset:
. Exercise 39
Typeset:
xi , yi ≥ 0.
∂G
∂G
= λs(s − 1)
.
∂t
∂s
1. Generate independent uniforms U and U1 .
(
X = 1/(4U − 1), V = U1 /X 2 if U < 0.5,
2. Set
X = 4U − 3, V = U1
otherwise.
3. If V < 1 − 0.5|X| go to 5.
4. If V ≥ (1 + X 2 /ν)−(ν+1)/2 go to 1.
5. Return X.
. Exercise 40
Typeset:
hi (t) = lim
→0
Rev: 352
1 P(t < Ti 6 t + )
.
P(Ti > t)
11
2017-02-06 22:05
2.7
2.7.1
Cross references
. Exercise 41
Create a reference to your first section using \ref and \label commands. An example
cross reference would work like this:
\section{Simple Text}
\label{sec:long}
Words are separated by one or more spaces. Paragraphs...
In this section the label has been defined as {sec:long}. Labels can contain any text you like, but generally
using a consistent and memorable naming scheme is helpful. Then set up the reference at some other place
in the text.
\subsection{A Warning or Two}
After looking at some longer text in section \ref{sec:long} on page \pageref{sec:long} we
can see...
2.7.2
Including pictures
. Exercise 42
http://www.stats.ox.ac.uk/pub/susan/oucs_latex
In the following examples, panic.png has been used. This means that the file should be compiled LaTeX
=> PDF. Add the following line to the preamble at the beginning of your file.
\usepackage{graphicx}
To include the graph found in the file, panic.png use
\includegraphics[scale=.4]{panic.png} at the place in your document where you want the picture to
appear.
I have scaled the picture to .4 of the original size.
The basic \includegraphics command can be developed. You can centre the graph on the page with the
following commands
\begin{figure}[ht]
\centering
{\includegraphics[scale=.4]{panic.png}}
\end{figure}
2017-02-06 22:05
12
Rev: 352
These commands produce a graph that is centred horizontally on the page. I have included [ht] after
\begin{figure} to ensure that the graph appears where I want it.
2.7.3
Bibliographies
. Exercise 43 A simple bibliography. This exercises needs the test.bib file, which should be in the
same folder as your .tex file.
• In the preamble include \usepackage{natbib}.This uses both author–year and numerical citations.
• At the end of the .tex file, before \end{document} add, exactly as they appear here:
\bibliographystyle{plainnat}
\bibliography{test}
There are many other bibliography styles but plainnat is widely used. Here are a few example citations
for you to try:
Using \cite{Austen.09} produces ?.
Using \citep{Austen.09} produces [?].
Using \cite{Rumel.ZZ.86} produces ?.
Using \citep{Rumel.ZZ.86} produces [?].
Using\citet*{Rumel.ZZ.86} produces ?.
Using \citep*{Rumel.ZZ.86} produces [?].
Note that each example produces a slightly different format for the citation.
To process a document containing citations you should compile or typeset your LATEX file at least three
times. If citations appear as question marks (?) then compile again. So you need the following
PDFLaTeX
PDFLaTeX
BiBTeX
PDFLaTeX
PDFLaTeX
If a .bib+ file has citations in the citations, then a further run of BibTeX and two more of PDFLaTeX are
needed.
(report class) you need to add a line after \bibliography{test} line.
Rev: 352
13
2017-02-06 22:05
If your .tex document uses article class then use:
and if you are using report class
2017-02-06 22:05
14
Rev: 352
Chapter 3
3.1
Special Characters
The following symbols are reserved characters, that either have a special meaning under LATEX or are not
available in all the fonts. If you enter them in your text directly, they will normally not print, but rather
coerce LATEX to do things you did not intend.
$& % # _ { } ~ ^ \ As you will see, these characters can be used in your documents all the same by adding a prefix backslash:$&%#_{}
\$\& \% \# \_ \{ \} The other symbols and many more can be printed with special commands in mathematical formulae or as accents. 3.2 Dashes and Hyphens LATEX knows four kinds of dashes. You can access three of these with different numbers of consecutive dashes. The fourth sign is actually no dash at all: It is the mathematical minus sign: daughter-in-law, X-rated pages 13–67 yes—or no? 0, 1 and −1 daughter-in-law, X-rated pages 13--67 yes---or no?$0$,$1$and$-1$The names for these dashes are: - hyphen, -- en-dash, --- em-dash and$-$minus sign. 3.3 Quotation Marks For quotation marks you should not use the " as on a typewriter. In publishing there are special opening and closing quotation marks. In LATEX, use two s on for opening quotation marks and two 's for closing quotation marks. “Please press the ‘x’ key.” Please press the x' key.'' 15 CHAPTER 3. HELPFUL HINTS3.4. ACCENTS AND SPECIAL CHARACTERS 3.4 Accents and Special Characters LATEX supports the use of accents and special characters from many languages. Table 3.1 shows all sorts of accents being applied to the letter o. Naturally other letters work too. Table 3.1: Accents and Special Characters ò ō \‘o \=o ó ȯ \’o \.o ô ö \^o \"o õ \~o ŏ o. \u o \d o \v o \b o ő o o \H o \t oo o̧ \c o œ å \oe \aa ǒ o ¯ Œ Å \OE \AA æ \ae Æ \AE ø ı \o \i Ø \O \j ł ¡ \l ! Ł ¿ \L ? To place an accent on top of an i or a j, their dots have to be removed. This is accomplished by typing \i and \j. Here are some more examples. H\^otel, na\"\i ve, \'el\eve, sm\o rrebr\o d, !Se\~norita!, Sch\"onbrunner Schlo\ss{} Stra\ss e Hôtel, naïve, élève, smørrebrød, ¡Señorita!, Schönbrunner Schloß Straße 3.5 List of Mathematical Symbols In the following tables you find all the symbols normally accessible from math mode. Table 3.2: Math Mode Accents â à ā \hat{a} \grave{a} \bar{a} ǎ ȧ ~a \check{a} \dot{a} \vec{a} ã ä b A \tilde{a} \ddot{a} \widehat{A} á ă e A \acute{a} \breve{a} \widetilde{A} Table 3.3: Lowercase Greek Letters α β γ δ ε ζ η 2017-02-06 22:05 \alpha \beta \gamma \delta \epsilon \varepsilon \zeta \eta θ ϑ ι κ λ µ ν ξ \theta \vartheta \iota \kappa \lambda \mu \nu \xi 16 o π$
ρ
%
σ
ς
τ
o
\pi
\varpi
\rho
\varrho
\sigma
\varsigma
\tau
υ
φ
ϕ
χ
ψ
ω
\upsilon
\phi
\varphi
\chi
\psi
\omega
Rev: 352
CHAPTER 3. HELPFUL HINTS3.5. LIST OF MATHEMATICAL SYMBOLS
Table 3.4: Uppercase Greek Letters
Γ
∆
Θ
\Gamma
\Delta
\Theta
\Lambda
\Xi
\Pi
Λ
Ξ
Π
Σ
Υ
Φ
\Sigma
\Upsilon
\Phi
Ψ
Ω
\Psi
\Omega
Table 3.5: Binary Relations
You can produce corresponding negations by adding a \not command as prefix to the following symbols.
<
≤
≺
⊂
⊆
@
v
∈

|
^
:
<
\leq or \le
\ll
\prec
\preceq
\subset
\subseteq
\sqsubset a
\sqsubseteq
\in
\vdash
\mid
\smile
:
a
>
≥
⊃
⊇
A
w
3
a
k
_
∈
/
>
\geq or \ge
\gg
\succ
\succeq
\supset
\supseteq
\sqsupset a
\sqsupseteq
\ni , \owns
\dashv
\parallel
\frown
\notin
=
≡
.
=
∼
'
≈
∼
=
1
./
∝
|=
⊥
6=
=
\equiv
\doteq
\sim
\simeq
\approx
\cong
\Join a
\bowtie
\propto
\models
\perp
\asymp
\neq or \ne
Use the latexsym package to access this symbol
Table 3.6: Binary Operators
+
±
·
×
∪
t
∨
⊕
⊗
4
Rev: 352
+
\pm
\cdot
\times
\cup
\sqcup
\vee , \lor
\oplus
\odot
\otimes
\bigtriangleup
\lhd a
\unlhd a
−
∓
÷
\
∩
u
∧
5
\mp
\div
\setminus
\cap
\sqcap
\wedge , \land
\ominus
\oslash
\bigcirc
\bigtriangledown
\rhd a
\unrhd a
17
/
.
?
∗
◦
•
]
q
†
‡
o
\triangleleft
\triangleright
\star
\ast
\circ
\bullet
\diamond
\uplus
\amalg
\dagger
\ddagger
\wr
2017-02-06 22:05
CHAPTER 3. HELPFUL HINTS3.5. LIST OF MATHEMATICAL SYMBOLS
P
Q

R
Table 3.7: BIG Operators
W
\bigcup
\bigvee
V
\bigcap
\bigwedge
\bigsqcup
\oint
S
T
F
H
\sum
\prod
\coprod
\int
L
N
J
U
\bigoplus
\bigotimes
\bigodot
\biguplus
Table 3.8: Arrows
←
→
↔
⇐
⇒
⇔
7→
←(
)
\leftarrow or \gets
\rightarrow or \to
\leftrightarrow
\Leftarrow
\Rightarrow
\Leftrightarrow
\mapsto
\hookleftarrow
\leftharpoonup
\leftharpoondown
\rightleftharpoons
a
←−
−→
←→
⇐=
=⇒
⇐⇒
7−→
,→
*
+
⇐⇒
\longleftarrow
\longrightarrow
\longleftrightarrow
\Longleftarrow
\Longrightarrow
\Longleftrightarrow
\longmapsto
\hookrightarrow
\rightharpoonup
\rightharpoondown
\iff (bigger spaces)
↑
↓
l
⇑
⇓
m
%
&
.
;
\uparrow
\downarrow
\updownarrow
\Uparrow
\Downarrow
\Updownarrow
\nearrow
\searrow
\swarrow
\nwarrow
Use the latexsym package to access this symbol
Table 3.9: Delimiters
(
[
{
h
b
/
(
[ or \lbrack
\{ or \lbrace
\langle
\lfloor
/




2017-02-06 22:05
\lgroup
\arrowvert
)
]
}
i
c
\
)
] or \rbrack
\} or \rbrace
\rangle
\rfloor
\backslash
↑
↓
l
|
d
\uparrow
\downarrow
\updownarrow
| or \vert
\lceil
. (dual. empty)
Table 3.10: Large Delimiters


 \rgroup
 \lmoustache
w

w \Arrowvert 
 \bracevert

18
⇑
⇓
m
k
e


\Uparrow
\Downarrow
\Updownarrow
\| or \Vert
\rceil
\rmoustache
Rev: 352
CHAPTER 3. HELPFUL HINTS3.5. LIST OF MATHEMATICAL SYMBOLS
Table 3.11: Miscellaneous Symbols
...
~
<
∀
0
∇
⊥
♦
¬
\dots
\hbar
\Re
\forall
’
\nabla
\bot
\diamondsuit
\neg or \lnot
a
···
ı
=
∃
0
4
>
♥
[
..
.

ℵ
f
∅
2
∠
♣
\
\cdots
\imath
\Im
\exists
\prime
\triangle
\top
\heartsuit
\flat
..
\vdots
\jmath
\aleph
\mho a
\emptyset
\Box a
\angle
\clubsuit
\natural
.

℘
∂
∞
3
√
♠
]
\ddots
\ell
\wp
\partial
\infty
\Diamond a
\surd
\sharp
Use the latexsym package to access this symbol
Table 3.12: Non-Mathematical Symbols
These symbols can also be used in text mode.
†
‡
\dag
\ddag
§
¶
\S
\P
\pounds
£
The symbols in the following tables all require the amssymb package.
Table 3.13: AMS Delimiters
p
q
\ulcorner
\urcorner
x
\llcorner
y
\lrcorner
Table 3.14: AMS Greek and Hebrew
z
Rev: 352
\digamma
κ
\varkappa
i
19
\beth
k
\daleth
‫ג‬
\gimel
2017-02-06 22:05
CHAPTER 3. HELPFUL HINTS3.5. LIST OF MATHEMATICAL SYMBOLS
Table 3.15: AMS Binary Relations
l
6
0
5
≪
.
/
≶
Q
S
4
2
w
j
b
@
∴
p

C
E
\lessdot
\leqslant
\eqslantless
\leqq
\lll or \llless
\lesssim
\lessapprox
\lessgtr
\lesseqgtr
\lesseqqgtr
\preccurlyeq
\curlyeqprec
\precsim
\precapprox
\subseteqq
\Subset
\sqsubset
\therefore
\shortmid
\smallsmile
\vartriangleleft
\trianglelefteq
m
>
1
=
≫
&
'
≷
R
T
<
3
%
v
k
c
A
∵
q
a
B
D
\gtrdot
\geqslant
\eqslantgtr
\geqq
\ggg or \gggtr
\gtrsim
\gtrapprox
\gtrless
\gtreqless
\gtreqqless
\succcurlyeq
\curlyeqsucc
\succsim
\succapprox
\supseteqq
\Supset
\sqsupset
\because
\shortparallel
\smallfrown
\vartriangleright
\trianglerighteq
+
:
;
P
$, l m ∼ ≈ u v w  ∝ G t J I \doteqdot or \Doteq \risingdotseq \fallingdotseq \eqcirc \circeq \triangleq \bumpeq \Bumpeq \thicksim \thickapprox \approxeq \backsim \backsimeq \vDash \Vdash \Vvdash \backepsilon \varpropto \between \pitchfork \blacktriangleleft \blacktriangleright Table 3.16: AMS Arrows L99 ⇔ W " x \dashleftarrow \leftleftarrows \leftrightarrows \Lleftarrow \twoheadleftarrow \leftarrowtail \leftrightharpoons \Lsh \looparrowleft \curvearrowleft \circlearrowleft 2017-02-06 22:05 99K ⇒ V # y \dashrightarrow \rightrightarrows \rightleftarrows \Rrightarrow \twoheadrightarrow \rightarrowtail \rightleftharpoons \Rsh \looparrowright \curvearrowright \circlearrowright 20 ( ! \multimap \upuparrows \downdownarrows \upharpoonleft \upharpoonright \downharpoonleft \downharpoonright \rightsquigarrow \leftrightsquigarrow Rev: 352 CHAPTER 3. HELPFUL HINTS3.5. LIST OF MATHEMATICAL SYMBOLS Table 3.17: AMS Negated Binary Relations and Arrows *$
\nless
\lneq
\nleq
\nleqslant
\lneqq
\lvertneqq
\nleqq
\lnsim
\lnapprox
\nprec
\npreceq
\precneqq
\precnsim
\precnapprox
\subsetneq
\varsubsetneq
\nsubseteq
\subsetneqq
≯
)
!
+
%
\ngtr
\gneq
\ngeq
\ngeqslant
\gneqq
\gvertneqq
\ngeqq
\gnsim
\gnapprox
\nsucc
\nsucceq
\succneqq
\succnsim
\succnapprox
\supsetneq
\varsupsetneq
\nsupseteq
\supsetneqq
&
'
"
#
∦
.
/
0
2
1
3
6
7
5
4
\varsubsetneqq
\varsupsetneqq
\nsubseteqq
\nsupseteqq
\nmid
\nparallel
\nshortmid
\nshortparallel
\nsim
\ncong
\nvdash
\nvDash
\nVdash
\nVDash
\ntriangleleft
\ntriangleright
\ntrianglelefteq
\ntrianglerighteq
8
:
\nleftarrow
\nLeftarrow
9
;
\nrightarrow
\nRightarrow
=
<
\nleftrightarrow
\nLeftrightarrow
≮
⊀
(
Table 3.18: AMS Binary Operators
u
n
d
Y
h
g
Rev: 352
\dotplus
\ltimes
\Cup or \doublecup
\veebar
\boxplus
\boxtimes
\leftthreetimes
\curlyvee
o
e
Z
i
f
\centerdot
\rtimes
\Cap or \doublecap
\barwedge
\boxminus
\boxdot
\rightthreetimes
\curlywedge
21
|
>
r
[

}
~
\intercal
\divideontimes
\smallsetminus
\doublebarwedge
\circleddash
\circledcirc
\circledast
2017-02-06 22:05
CHAPTER 3. HELPFUL HINTS3.5. LIST OF MATHEMATICAL SYMBOLS
Table 3.19: AMS Miscellaneous
~
M
O
♦
∠
@
ð
\hbar
\square
\vartriangle
\triangledown
\lozenge
\angle
\diagup
\nexists
\eth
}
N
H
]

f
\hslash
\blacksquare
\blacktriangle
\blacktriangledown
\blacklozenge
\measuredangle
\diagdown
\Finv
\mho
k
s
{
a
F
^
8
∅
\Bbbk
\circledS
\complement
\Game
\bigstar
\sphericalangle
\backprime
\varnothing
Table 3.20: Math Alphabets
Example
ABCdef
ABCdef
ABCdef
ABC
ABC
2017-02-06 22:05
Command
\mathrm{ABCdef}
\mathit{ABCdef}
\mathnormal{ABCdef}
\mathcal{ABC}
\mathbb{ABC}
22
Required package
amsfonts or amssymb
Rev: 352
Chapter 4
Copy this file to your directory and look up how to process it in the local guide. Note how the input .tex
file contains quite verbose instructions in plain text, which are the typesetting commands.
To include color in a file you need to add
\usepackage{color}
in the preamble and then \textcolor{red}{red text} in the text to get red text.
I entered the room and—horrors—I saw both my father-in-law and my mother-in-law.
The winter of 1484–1485 was one of discontent.
Frank wondered, “Is this a girl that can’t say ‘No!’?”
Does Æschylus understand Œdipus?
They took some honey and plenty of money wrapped up in a £5 note.
Élèves, refusez vos leçons! Jetez vos chaînes!
Can you take a ferry from Öland to Åland?
I entered the room and---horrors---I saw both my
father-in-law and my mother-in-law.
The winter of 1484--1485 was one of discontent.
Frank wondered, Is this a girl that can't say No!'?''
Does \AE schylus understand \OE dipus?
They took some honey and plenty of money wrapped up in a
\pounds 5 note.
23
\'El\eves, refusez vos le\c cons! Jetez vos cha\^\i nes!
Can you take a ferry from \"Oland to \AA land?
Don’t forget to run LATEX twice to make sure the table of contents is up to date.
1. You can mix list environments as much as you like
• But it might start to look silly
- With different symbols
2. So do remember
Stupid things will not become smart because they are in a list.
Smart things, though, can be presented beautifully in a list.
\begin{enumerate}
\item You can mix list environments as much as you like
\begin{itemize}
\item But it might start to look silly
\item[-]With different symbols
\end{itemize}
\item So do remember
\begin{description}
\item[Stupid] things will not become smart because they are in a list.
\item[Smart] things, though, can be presented beautifully in a list.
\end{description}
Vegetable Production
Vegetable
Weight
Carrots
Lettuce
French beans
Good early crop, then carrot fly.
Slow to start, then bolted.
Excellent.
7kg
1kg
12kg
\begin{center}
\medskip
{\large \bfseries Vegetable Production}
\begin{tabular}{|l|l|r|} \hline
{\textsf Vegetable } & {\textsf Comments} & {\textsf Weight}\\
\hline \hline
Carrots & Good early crop, then carrot fly. & 7kg \\
Lettuce & Slow to start, then bolted. & 1kg \\
French beans & Excellent. & 12kg \\ \hline
\end{tabular}
2017-02-06 22:05
24
Rev: 352
\end{center}
Currencies 1 Jan 1992
London:
£: $1.8672 £: DM 2.8369 £: FFr 9.969080 New York: £:$ 1.8655
$: DM 1.5175$: FFr 5.1845
\begin{center}
\medskip
{\Large \textbf Currencies 1 Jan 1992}\\
\bigskip
\begin{tabular}{ll}
\sffamily \large London: & \sffamily\large New York:\\ \hline \hline
\pounds : \$1.8672 &\pounds : \$ 1.8655 \\
\pounds : DM 2.8369 &\$: DM 1.5175\\ \pounds : FFr 9.969080 &\$: FFr 5.1845
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
C(n, r) = n!/(r! (n − r)!).
$C(n,r)=n!/(r!\,(n-r)!).$
This equation is in-line a + b = c − d = xy = w/z and the following one is displayed.
a + b = c − d = xy = w/z
This equation is in-line $a+b=c-d=xy=w/z$ and the following
one is displayed. $$a+b=c-d=xy=w/z$$
An in-line example: (f g)0 = f 0 g + f g 0 followed by one that is displayed:
(f g)0 = f 0 g + f g 0
An in-line example: $(fg)' = f'g + fg'$ followed by one
that is displayed: $$(fg)' = f'g + fg'$$
In-line the equation is αβ = γ + δ and displayed
αβ = γ + δ
In-line the equation is $\alpha\beta =\gamma+\delta$ and displayed
$$\alpha \beta = \gamma + \delta$$
Rev: 352
25
2017-02-06 22:05
In-line the equation is Γ(n) = (n − 1)! and displayed
Γ(n) = (n − 1)!
In-line the equation is $\Gamma (n) = (n-1)!$ and displayed
$$\Gamma (n) = (n-1)!$$
x ∧ (y ∨ z) = (x ∧ y) ∨ (x ∧ z).
$x\wedge (y\vee z) = (x\wedge y) \vee (x\wedge z)$.
2 + 4 + 6 + · · · + 2n = n(n + 1).
$2 + 4 + 6 + \cdots + 2n = n(n+1).$
~x · ~y = 0 if and only if ~x ⊥ ~y .
$\vec x\cdot \vec y = 0$ if and only if $\vec x \perp \vec y$.
~x · ~y 6= 0 if and only if ~x 6⊥ ~y .
$\vec x\cdot \vec y \not= 0$ if and only if $\vec x \not\perp \vec y.$
or use ~x · ~y 6= 0 which is $\vec x\cdot \vec y \ne 0$
(∀x ∈ R)(∃y ∈ R) such that y > x.
$(\forall x \in \mathbb{R}) (\exists y \in \mathbb{R})$ such that $y>x.$
Note that amssymb must be included in the usepackage declaration at the beginning of the file in order to
use \mathbb{R}.
a+b
c
a
b+c
1
a+b+c
6=
1
a
+
1
b
+ 1c .
$\frac{a+b}{c}\quad \frac{a}{b+c}\quad \frac{1}{a+b+c} \not= \frac{1}{a}+\frac{1}{b}+\frac{1}{c}.$
\ne could be used instead of \not=
What are the points where
∂
∂x f (x, y)
=
∂
∂y f (x, y)
= 0?
What are the points where $\frac{\partial}{\partial x}f(x,y)=\frac {\partial}{\partial y}f(x,y)=0$?
2017-02-06 22:05
26
Rev: 352
e−x
ex
eiπ + 1 = 0 x0
x20
x0 2
x
2x .
$e^x \quad e^{-x} \quad e^{i\pi}+1=0 \quad x_0 \quad \quad {x_0}^2\quad 2^{x^x}$.
x^2_0
∂2f
∂x2
∇2 f (x, y) =
+
∂2f
.
∂y 2
$\nabla^2 f(x,y) = \frac{\partial^2 f}{\partial x^2} + \frac{\partial^2 f}{\partial y^2}$.
1
limx→0 (1 + x) x = e.
$\lim_{x\to 0} (1+x)^{\frac{1}{x}}=e$.
The cardinality of (−∞, ∞) is ℵ1 .
The cardinality of $(-\infty ,\infty)$ is $\aleph_1$.
limx→0+ xx = 1.
$\lim_{x\to {0^+}} x^x = 1$.
R1
0
3x2 dx = 1.
$\int_0^1 \,3x^2\,\mathrm{d}x=1$.
√
q
2
√
3
10
x+y
x−y
√
e
x.
$\sqrt2 \quad \sqrt \frac{x+y}{x-y} \quad \root 3 \of {10}$
\quad $e^{\sqrt x}$.
kxk =
√
x · x.
$\|x\| = \sqrt{x\cdot x}$.
φ(t) =
√1
2π
Rt
0
e−x
2 /2
dx.
$\phi(t) = \frac{1}{\sqrt{2_\pi}} \int_0^t \, e^{-x^{2}/2},\mathrm{d}x$.
x
y
x + y.
Rev: 352
27
2017-02-06 22:05
$\underline x \quad \overline y \quad \underline{\overline{x+y}}$.
bxc ≤ dxe .
$\bigl \lceil \lfloor x\rfloor \bigr \rceil \leq \bigl \lfloor \lceil x\rceil \bigr \rfloor$.
sin(2θ) = 2 sin θ cos θ
cos(2θ) = 2 cos2 θ − 1.
$\sin(2\theta ) = 2 \sin\theta\cos\theta \quad \cos(2\theta) = 2\cos^2\theta - 1$.
Z
sin α
=1
α→0 α
csc2 x dx = − cot x + C
lim
sin α
= 0.
α→∞ α
lim
$$\int \csc^2x\, \mathrm{d}x = -\cot x + C \qquad \lim_{\alpha\to 0} \frac{\sin\alpha}{\alpha} = 1 \qquad \lim_{\alpha \to \infty} \frac{\sin\alpha}{\alpha} = 0.$$
tan(2θ) =
2 tan θ
.
1 − tan2 θ
$$\tan (2\theta) = \frac{2\tan\theta}{1-\tan^2\theta}.$$

aa · · ·
 .. . .
 .
.
za · · ·
$$\left[ \begin{array}{ccc} aa & \cdots & az \\ \vdots & \ddots & \vdots \\ za & \cdots & zz \end{array} \right]$$

az
.. 
. 
zz
A random variable Y has density
f (y; θ, φ) = exp
yθ − b(θ)
+ c(y; φ)
aφ
and its moment-generating function is M (t) = exp[{b(θ + taφ) − b(θ)}/(aφ)].
2017-02-06 22:05
28
Rev: 352
A random variable $Y$ has density
$$f(y;\theta,\phi) = \exp\left\{ \frac{y\theta-b(\theta)} {a\phi} + c(y;\phi)\right\}$$
and its moment-generating function is $M(t)$M(t) = \exp[ \{b(\theta+ta\phi) - b(\theta)\}/(a\phi)]$. . Answer 36 If Yrc , r = 1, . . . , R, c = 1, . . . , C are random variables, show that X r,c (Yrc − Y .. )2 = X r,c (Y r. − Y .. )2 + X r,c (Y .c − Y .. )2 + X (Yrc − Y .c − eY.. )2 . (4.1) r,c If$Y_{rc}$,$r=1,\ldots, R$,$c=1,\ldots, C$are random variables, show that $$\label{linear.models.equation.1} \sum_{r,c} (Y_{rc}-\overline Y_{..})^2 = \sum_{r,c} (\overline Y_{r.}-\overline Y _{..})^2 + \sum_{r,c} (\overline Y_{.c}-\overline Y_{..})^2 + \sum_{r,c} (Y_{rc} - \overline Y_{.c} - \overline e Y_{..})^2.$$ . Answer 37 f (yi | λi , ψ) = λi ψe−λi ψyi , f (xi | λi ) = λi e−λi xi , $$f(x_i\,|\,\lambda_i) = \lambda_i e^{-\lambda_i x_i}, \qquad f(y_i\,|\,\lambda_i, \psi) = \lambda_i\psi e^{-\lambda_i\psi y_i}, \qquad x_i, y_i \ge 0.$$ xi , yi ≥ 0. You could use \mid, but the spacing would be larger. . Answer 38 ∂G ∂G = λs(s − 1) . ∂t ∂s $$\frac{\partial G}{\partial t} = \lambda s(s-1) \frac{\partial G}{\partial s}.$$ . Answer 39 1. Generate independent uniforms U and U1 . ( X = 1/(4U − 1), V = U1 /X 2 if U < 0.5, 2. Set X = 4U − 3, V = U1 otherwise. 3. If V < 1 − 0.5|X| go to 5. 4. If V ≥ (1 + X 2 /ν)−(ν+1)/2 go to 1. 5. Return X. Rev: 352 29 2017-02-06 22:05 CHAPTER 4. ANSWERS Figure 4.1: After one compilation Figure 4.2: After two compilations \begin{enumerate} \item Generate independent uniforms$U$and$U_1$. \item$
\mbox{Set } \begin{cases}
X = 1/(4U - 1), V = U_1/X^2& \mbox{if $U < 0.5$,}\\
X = 4U - 3, V = U_1 & \mbox{otherwise}.
\end{cases}
$\item If$V < 1 - 0.5|X|$go to 5. \item If$ V \ge (1 + X^2/\nu)^{-(\nu+1)/2}$go to 1. \item Return$X$. \end{enumerate} The amsmaths cases environment was used here. . Answer 40 1 P(t < Ti 6 t + ) . →0 P(Ti > t) hi (t) = lim \renewcommand{\Pr}{\mathsf{P}} $$h_i(t)=\lim_{\epsilon\to 0} \frac{1}{\epsilon} \frac{\Pr(t<T_i\leqslant t+\epsilon)}{\Pr(T_i>t)}.$$ . Answer 41 Note that you will see LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references. so run LATEX twice to get the references resolved. After the first run you will see . Answer 42 When including images it is important to be aware that different format image files need different compilation methods. .ps, .eps images need to be compiled to DVI, then PostScript and then possibly PDF. .jpg, .pdf, .png images are compiled directly to PDF. . Answer 43 2017-02-06 22:05 30 Rev: 352 CHAPTER 4. ANSWERS Remember that you need to run LATEX twice, then bibtex and then LATEX twice again to get all the references sorted out. Rev: 352 31 2017-02-06 22:05 CHAPTER 4. ANSWERS4.1. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 4.1 Acknowledgements I would like to thank Professor Brian Ripley for permission to use material from exercises he devised for the Department of Statistics as part of an introductory LATEX course. 2017-02-06 22:05 32 Rev: 352 The Not So Short Introduction to LATEX 2ε Or LATEX 2ε in 157 minutes by Tobias Oetiker Hubert Partl, Irene Hyna and Elisabeth Schlegl Version 5.06, June 20, 2016 ii Copyright ©1995-2016 Tobias Oetiker and Contributors. All rights reserved. This document is free; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This document is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but without any warranty; without even the implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this document; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. Thank you! Much of the material used in this introduction comes from an Austrian introduction to LATEX 2.09 written in German by: Hubert Partl <partl@mail.boku.ac.at> Zentraler Informatikdienst der Universität für Bodenkultur Wien Irene Hyna <Irene.Hyna@bmwf.ac.at> Bundesministerium für Wissenschaft und Forschung Wien Elisabeth Schlegl in Graz <noemail> If you are interested in the German document, you can find a version updated for LATEX 2ε by Jörg Knappen at CTAN://info/lshort/german iv Thank you! The following individuals helped with corrections, suggestions and material to improve this paper. They put in a big effort to help me get this document into its present shape. I would like to sincerely thank all of them. Naturally, all the mistakes you’ll find in this book are mine. If you ever find a word that is spelled correctly, it must have been one of the people below dropping me a line. If you want to contribute to this booklet, you can find all the source code on https://github.com/oetiker/lshort. Your pull requests will be appreciated. Eric Abrahamsen, Lenimar Nunes de Andrade, Eilinger August, Rosemary Bailey, Barbara Beeton, Marc Bevand, Connor Blakey, Salvatore Bonaccorso, Pietro Braione, Friedemann Brauer, Markus Brühwiler, Jan Busa, David Carlisle, Neil Carter, Carl Cerecke, Mike Chapman, Pierre Chardaire, Xingyou Chen, Christopher Chin, Diego Clavadetscher, Wim van Dam, Benjamin Deschwanden Jan Dittberner, Michael John Downes, Matthias Dreier, David Dureisseix, Hans Ehrbar, Elliot, Rockrush Engch, William Faulk, Robin Fairbairns, Johan Falk, Jörg Fischer, Frank Fischli, Daniel Flipo, Frank, Mic Milic Frederickx, David Frey, Erik Frisk, Hans Fugal, Robert Funnell, Greg Gamble, Andy Goth, Cyril Goutte, Kasper B. Graversen, Arlo Griffiths, Alexandre Guimond, Neil Hammond, Christoph Hamburger, Rasmus Borup Hansen, Joseph Hilferty, Daniel Hirsbrunner, Martien Hulsen, Björn Hvittfeldt, Morten Høgholm, Werner Icking, Eric Jacoboni, Jakob, Alan Jeffrey, Martin Jenkins, Byron Jones, David Jones, Johannes-Maria Kaltenbach, Nils Kanning, Andrzej Kawalec, Christian Kern, Alain Kessi, Axel Kielhorn, Sander de Kievit, Kjetil Kjernsmo, Tobias Klauser, Jörg Knappen, Michael Koundouros, Matt Kraai, Tobias Krewer, Flori Lambrechts, Mike Lee, Maik Lehradt, Rémi Letot, Axel Liljencrantz, Jasper Loy, Johan Lundberg, Martin Maechler, Alexander Mai, Claus Malten, Kevin Van Maren, Pablo Markin, I. J. Vera Marún, Hendrik Maryns, Chris McCormack, Aleksandar S. Milosevic, Henrik Mitsch, Stefan M. Moser, Armin Müller, Philipp Nagele, Richard Nagy, Manuel Oetiker, Urs Oswald, Hubert Partl, Marcelo Pasin, Martin Pfister, Lan Thuy Pham, Breno Pietracci, Demerson Andre Polli, Maksym Polyakov, Nikos Pothitos, John Refling, Mike Ressler, Brian Ripley, Kurt Rosenfeld, Bernd Rosenlecher, Chris Rowley, Young U. Ryu, Risto Saarelma, András Salamon, José Carlos Santos, Christopher Sawtell, Gilles Schintgen, Craig Schlenter, Hanspeter Schmid, Baron Schwartz, Jordi Serra i Solanich, Miles Spielberg, Susan Stewart, Matthieu Stigler, Geoffrey Swindale, Laszlo Szathmary, Boris Tobotras, Josef Tkadlec, Scott Veirs, Didier Verna, Carl-Gustav Werner, Fabian Wernli, Matthew Widmann, David Woodhouse, Chris York, Rick Zaccone, Fritz Zaucker, and Mikhail Zotov. Preface LATEX [1] is a typesetting system that is very suitable for producing scientific and mathematical documents of high typographical quality. It is also suitable for producing all sorts of other documents, from simple letters to complete books. LATEX uses TEX [2] as its formatting engine. This short introduction describes LATEX 2ε and should be sufficient for most applications of LATEX. Refer to [1, 3] for a complete description of the LATEX system. This introduction is split into 6 chapters: Chapter 1 tells you about the basic structure of LATEX 2ε documents. You will also learn a bit about the history of LATEX. After reading this chapter, you should have a rough understanding how LATEX works. Chapter 2 goes into the details of typesetting your documents. It explains most of the essential LATEX commands and environments. After reading this chapter, you will be able to write your first documents. Chapter 3 explains how to typeset formulae with LATEX. Many examples demonstrate how to use one of LATEX’s main strengths. At the end of the chapter are tables listing all mathematical symbols available in LATEX. Chapter 4 explains indexes, bibliography generation and inclusion of EPS graphics. It introduces creation of PDF documents with pdfLATEX$$and$$presents some handy extension packages. Chapter 5 shows how to use LATEX for creating graphics. Instead of drawing a picture with some graphics program, saving it to a file and then including it into LATEX, you describe the picture and have LATEX draw it for you. Chapter 6 contains some potentially dangerous information about how to alter the standard document layout produced by LATEX. It will tell you how to change things such that the beautiful output of LATEX turns ugly or stunning, depending on your abilities. vi Preface It is important to read the chapters in order—the book is not that big, after all. Be sure to carefully read the examples, because a lot of the information is in the examples placed throughout the book. LATEX is available for most computers, from the PC and Mac to large UNIX and VMS systems. On many university computer clusters you will find that a LATEX installation is available, ready to use. Information on how to access the local LATEX installation should be provided in the Local Guide [5]. If you have problems getting started, ask the person who gave you this booklet. The scope of this document is not to tell you how to install and set up a LATEX system, but to teach you how to write your documents so that they can be processed by LATEX. If you need to get hold of any LATEX related material, have a look at one of the Comprehensive TEX Archive Network (CTAN) sites. The homepage is at http://www.ctan.org. You will find other references to CTAN throughout the book, especially pointers to software and documents you might want to download. Instead of writing down complete urls, I just wrote CTAN: followed by whatever location within the CTAN tree you should go to. If you want to run LATEX on your own computer, take a look at what is available from CTAN://systems. If you have ideas for something to be added, removed or altered in this document, please let me know. I am especially interested in feedback from LATEX novices about which bits of this intro are easy to understand$$and$$which could be explained better. Tobias Oetiker <tobi@oetiker.ch> OETIKER+PARTNER AG Aarweg 15 4600 Olten Switzerland The current version of this document is available on CTAN://info/lshort Contents Thank you! iii Preface v 1 Things You Need to Know 1.1 The Name of the Game . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 TEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 LATEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Author, Book Designer, and Typesetter 1.2.2 Layout Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.3 Advantages and Disadvantages . . . . . 1.3 LATEX Input Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2 Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.3 LATEX Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.4 Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Input File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 A Typical Command Line Session . . . . . . . 1.6 The Layout of the Document . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.1 Document Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.2 Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.3 Page Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 Files You Might Encounter . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 Big Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7 9 9 10 13 13 14 2 Typesetting Text 2.1 The Structure of Text and Language 2.2 Line Breaking and Page Breaking . . 2.2.1 Justified Paragraphs . . . . . 2.2.2 Hyphenation . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Ready-Made Strings . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Special Characters and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 17 19 19 20 21 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 22 22 22 22 23 23 24 24 24 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 38 38 41 41 42 42 42 43 44 44 45 45 48 51 3 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae 3.1 The AMS-LATEX bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Single Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Math Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Building Blocks of a Mathematical Formula . 3.4 Single Equations that are Too Long: multline 3.5 Multiple Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 Problems with Traditional Commands 3.5.2 IEEEeqnarray Environment . . . . . . 3.5.3 Common Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Arrays and Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 53 53 55 56 61 62 62 64 65 67 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.4.1 Quotation Marks . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.2 Dashes and Hyphens . . . . . . . . . 2.4.3 Tilde (∼) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.4 Slash (/) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.5 Degree Symbol (◦) . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.6 The Euro Currency Symbol (e) . . . 2.4.7 Ellipsis (. . . ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.8 Ligatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.9 Accents and Special Characters . . . International Language Support . . . . . . . 2.5.1 Support for Portuguese . . . . . . . 2.5.2 Support for French . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.3 Support for German . . . . . . . . . 2.5.4 Support for Korean . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.5 Writing in Greek . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.6 Support for Cyrillic . . . . . . . . . 2.5.7 Support for Mongolian . . . . . . . . 2.5.8 The Unicode option . . . . . . . . . The Space Between Words . . . . . . . . . . Titles, Chapters, and Sections . . . . . . . . Cross References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Footnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emphasized Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.1 Itemize, Enumerate, and Description 2.11.2 Flushleft, Flushright, and Center . . 2.11.3 Quote, Quotation, and Verse . . . . 2.11.4 Abstract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.5 Printing Verbatim . . . . . . . . . . 2.11.6 Tabular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floating Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protecting Fragile Commands . . . . . . . . CONTENTS 3.7 Spacing in Math Mode . . . . . 3.7.1 Phantoms . . . . . . . . 3.8 Fiddling with the Math Fonts . 3.8.1 Bold Symbols . . . . . . 3.9 Theorems, Lemmas, . . . . . . . 3.9.1 Proofs and End-of-Proof 3.10 List of Mathematical Symbols . ix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 70 70 71 71 72 75 4 Specialities 4.1 Including Encapsulated PostScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Fancy Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 The Verbatim Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Installing Extra Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Working with pdfLATEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1 PDF Documents for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2 The Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.3 Using Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.4 Hypertext Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.5 Problems with Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.6 Problems with Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.7 Source Compatibility Between LATEX and pdfLATEX . 4.8 Working with XELATEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1 The Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2 Compatibility Between XELATEX and pdfLATEX . . . 4.9 Creating Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 83 85 86 87 89 89 90 91 92 93 93 96 96 97 98 98 100 100 5 Producing Mathematical Graphics 5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 The picture Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Basic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Line Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.4 Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.5 Text and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.6 \multiput and \linethickness . . . . . . 5.2.7 Ovals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.8 Multiple Use of Predefined Picture Boxes . 5.2.9 Quadratic Bézier Curves . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.10 Catenary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.11 Rapidity in the Special Theory of Relativity 5.3 The PGF and TikZ Graphics Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 105 106 106 107 108 109 110 110 111 112 113 114 115 115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x CONTENTS 6 Customising LATEX 6.1 New Commands, Environments and Packages 6.1.1 New Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2 New Environments . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.3 Extra Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.4 Commandline LATEX . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.5 Your Own Package . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Fonts and Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Font Changing Commands . . . . . . 6.2.2 Danger, Will Robinson, Danger . . . . 6.2.3 Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 Line Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.2 Paragraph Formatting . . . . . . . . . 6.3.3 Horizontal Space . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.4 Vertical Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 More Fun With Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 119 120 121 121 122 123 123 123 126 127 127 127 128 129 130 131 133 133 135 A Installing LATEX A.1 What to Install . . . . . . . . . . . A.2 Cross Platform Editor . . . . . . . A.3 TEX on Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . A.3.1 TEX Distribution . . . . . . A.3.2 OSX TEX Editor . . . . . . A.3.3 Treat yourself to PDFView A.4 TEX on Windows . . . . . . . . . . A.4.1 Getting TEX . . . . . . . . A.4.2 A LATEX editor . . . . . . . A.4.3 Document Preview . . . . . A.4.4 Working with graphics . . . A.5 TEX on Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 137 137 138 138 138 138 138 138 139 139 139 139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bibliography 141 Index 144 List of Figures 1.1 1.2 A Minimal LATEX File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a Realistic Journal Article. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 8 4.1 4.2 Example fancyhdr Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Sample code for the beamer class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 6.1 6.2 Example Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Layout parameters for this book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 List of Tables 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Document Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . Document Class Options. . . . . . . . Some of the Packages Distributed with The Predefined Page Styles of LATEX. . . . . . . . . . LATEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 11 12 13 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 A bag full of Euro symbols . . . . . Accents and Special Characters. . . . Preamble for Portuguese documents. Special commands for French. . . . . German Special Characters. . . . . . Preamble for Greek documents. . . . Greek Special Characters. . . . . . . Bulgarian, Russian, and Ukrainian . Float Placing Permissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 25 28 29 29 31 32 33 49 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18 Math Mode Accents. . . . . . . Greek Letters. . . . . . . . . . . Binary Relations. . . . . . . . . Binary Operators. . . . . . . . BIG Operators. . . . . . . . . . Arrows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrows as Accents. . . . . . . . Delimiters. . . . . . . . . . . . Large Delimiters. . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Symbols. . . . . Non-Mathematical Symbols. . . AMS Delimiters. . . . . . . . . AMS Greek and Hebrew. . . . Math Alphabets. . . . . . . . . AMS Binary Operators. . . . . AMS Binary Relations. . . . . AMS Arrows. . . . . . . . . . . AMS Negated Binary Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and Arrows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 75 76 76 77 77 77 78 78 78 78 79 79 79 79 80 81 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv LIST OF TABLES 3.19 AMS Miscellaneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 4.2 Key Names for graphicx Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index Key Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Absolute Point Sizes in Standard Classes. Math Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEX Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 84 87 124 124 125 125 130 Chapter 1 Things You Need to Know The first part of this chapter presents a short overview of the philosophy$$and$$history of LATEX 2ε . The second part focuses on the basic structures of a LATEX document. After reading this chapter, you should have a rough knowledge of how LATEX works, which you will need to understand the rest of this book. 1.1 1.1.1 The Name of the Game TEX TEX is a computer program created by Donald E. Knuth [2]. It is aimed at typesetting text and mathematical formulae. Knuth started writing the TEX typesetting engine in 1977 to explore the potential of the digital printing equipment that was beginning to infiltrate the publishing industry at that time, especially in the hope that he could reverse the trend of deteriorating typographical quality that he saw affecting his own books and articles. TEX as we use it today was released in 1982, with some slight enhancements added in 1989 to better support 8-bit characters and multiple languages. TEX is renowned for being extremely stable, for running on many different kinds of computers, and for being virtually bug free. The version number of TEX is converging to π and is now at 3.141592653. TEX is pronounced “Tech,” with a “ch” as in the German word “Ach”1 or in the Scottish “Loch.” The “ch” originates from the Greek alphabet where X is the letter “ch” or “chi”. TEX is also the first syllable of the Greek word τεχνική (technique). In an ASCII environment, TEX becomes TeX. 1 In german there are actually two pronunciations for “ch” and one might assume that the soft “ch” sound from “Pech” would be a more appropriate. Asked about this, Knuth wrote in the German Wikipedia: I do not get angry when people pronounce TEX in their favorite way . . . and in Germany many use a soft ch because the X follows the vowel e, not the harder ch that follows the vowel a. In Russia, ‘tex’ is a very common word, pronounced ‘tyekh’. But I believe the most proper pronunciation is heard in Greece, where you have the harsher ch of ach and Loch. 2 Things You Need to Know 1.1.2 LATEX LATEX enables authors to typeset and print their work at the highest typographical quality, using a predefined, professional layout. LATEX was originally written by Leslie Lamport [1]. It uses the TEX formatter as its typesetting engine. These days LATEX is maintained by Frank Mittelbach. LATEX is pronounced “Lay-tech” or “Lah-tech.” If you refer to LATEX in an ASCII environment, you type LaTeX. LATEX 2ε is pronounced “Lay-tech two e” and typed LaTeX2e. 1.2 1.2.1 Basics Author, Book Designer, and Typesetter To publish something, authors give their typed manuscript to a publishing company. One of their book designers then decides the layout of the document (column width, fonts, space before and after headings, . . . ). The book designer writes his instructions into the manuscript and then gives it to a typesetter, who typesets the book according to these instructions. A human book designer tries to find out what the author had in mind while writing the manuscript. He decides on chapter headings, citations, examples, formulae, etc. based on his professional knowledge and from the contents of the manuscript. In a LATEX environment, LATEX takes the role of the book designer$$and$$uses TEX as its typesetter. But LATEX is “only” a program and therefore needs more guidance. The author has to provide additional information to describe the logical structure of his work. This information is written into the text as “LATEX commands.” This is quite different from the WYSIWYG2 approach that most modern word processors, such as MS Word or LibreOffice, take. With these applications, authors specify the document layout interactively while typing text into the computer. They can see on the screen how the final work will look when it is printed. When using LATEX it is not normally possible to see the final output while typing the text, but the final output can be previewed on the screen after processing the file with LATEX. Then corrections can be made before actually sending the document to the printer. 1.2.2 Layout Design Typographical design is a craft. Unskilled authors often commit serious formatting errors by assuming that book design is mostly a question of aesthetics—“If a document looks good artistically, it is well designed.” But 2 What you see is what you get. 1.2 Basics as a document has to be read and not hung up in a picture gallery, the readability and understandability is much more important than the beautiful look of it. Examples: • The font size and the numbering of headings have to be chosen to make the structure of chapters and sections clear to the reader. • The line length has to be short enough not to strain the eyes of the reader, while long enough to fill the page beautifully. With WYSIWYG systems, authors often generate aesthetically pleasing documents with very little or inconsistent structure. LATEX prevents such formatting errors by forcing the author to declare the logical structure of his document. LATEX then chooses the most suitable layout. 1.2.3 Advantages and Disadvantages When people from the WYSIWYG world meet people who use LATEX, they often discuss “the advantages of LATEX over a normal word processor” or the opposite. The best thing to do when such a discussion starts is to keep a low profile, since such discussions often get out of hand. But sometimes there is no escaping . . . So here is some ammunition. The main advantages of LATEX over normal word processors are the following: • Professionally crafted layouts are available, which make a document really look as if “printed.” • The typesetting of mathematical formulae is supported in a convenient way. • Users only need to learn a few easy-to-understand commands that specify the logical structure of a document. They almost never need to tinker with the actual layout of the document. • Even complex structures such as footnotes, references, table of contents, and bibliographies can be generated easily. • Free add-on packages exist for many typographical tasks not directly supported by basic LATEX. For example, packages are available to include PostScript graphics or to typeset bibliographies conforming to exact standards. Many of these add-on packages are described in The LATEX Companion [3]. • LATEX encourages authors to write well-structured texts, because this is how LATEX works—by specifying structure. 3 4 Things You Need to Know • TEX, the formatting engine of LATEX 2ε , is highly portable and free. Therefore the system runs on almost any hardware platform available. LATEX also has some disadvantages, and I guess it’s a bit difficult for me to find any sensible ones, though I am sure other people can tell you hundreds ;-) • LATEX does not work well for people who have sold their souls . . . • Although some parameters can be adjusted within a predefined document layout, the design of a whole new layout is difficult and takes a lot of time.3 • It is very hard to write unstructured and disorganized documents. • Your hamster might, despite some encouraging first steps, never be able to fully grasp the concept of Logical Markup. 1.3 LATEX Input Files The input for LATEX is a plain text file. On Unix/Linux text files are pretty common. On windows, one would use Notepad to create a text file. It contains the text of the document, as well as the commands that tell LATEX how to typeset the text. If you are working with a LATEX IDE, it will contain a program for creating LATEX input files in text format. 1.3.1 Spaces “Whitespace” characters, such as blank or tab, are treated uniformly as “space” by LATEX. Several consecutive whitespace characters are treated as one “space.” Whitespace at the start of a line is generally ignored, and a single line break is treated as “whitespace.” An empty line between two lines of text defines the end of a paragraph. Several empty lines are treated the same as one empty line. The text below is an example. On the left hand side is the text from the input file, and on the right hand side is the formatted output. It does not matter whether you enter one or several spaces after a word. An empty line starts a new paragraph. 3 It does not matter whether you enter one or several spaces after a word. An empty line starts a new paragraph. Rumour says that this is one of the key elements that will be addressed in the upcoming EX3 system. LAT 1.3 LATEX Input Files 1.3.2 5 Special Characters The following symbols are reserved characters that either have a special meaning under LATEX or are not available in all the fonts. If you enter them directly in your text, they will normally not print, but rather coerce LATEX to do things you did not intend. #$
%
^
&
_
{
}
~
\
As you will see, these characters can be used in your documents all the
same by using a prefix backslash:
\# \$\% \^{} \& \_ \{ \} \~{} \textbackslash #$%ˆ&_{}˜\
The other symbols and many more can be printed with special commands
in mathematical formulae or as accents. The backslash character \ can not
be entered by adding another backslash in front of it (\\); this sequence is
used for line breaking. Use the \textbackslash command instead.
1.3.3
LATEX Commands
LATEX commands are case sensitive, and take one of the following two formats:
• They start with a backslash \ and then have a name consisting of
letters only. Command names are terminated by a space, a number or
any other ‘non-letter.’
• They consist of a backslash and exactly one non-letter.
• Many commands exist in a ‘starred variant’ where a star is appended
to the command name.
LATEX ignores whitespace after commands. If you want to get a space after
a command, you have to put either an empty parameter {} and a blank or a
special spacing command after the command name. The empty parameter
{} stops LATEX from eating up all the white space after the command name.
New \TeX users may miss whitespaces
after a command. % renders wrong
Experienced \TeX{} users are
\TeX perts, and know how to use
whitespaces. % renders correct
New TEXusers may miss whitespaces after a command. Experienced TEX users
are TEXperts, and know how to use whitespaces.
Some commands require a parameter, which has to be given between
curly braces { } after the command name. Some commands take optional
parameters, which are inserted after the command name in square brackets [ ].
6
Things You Need to Know
\command[optional parameter]{parameter}
The next examples use some LATEX commands. Don’t worry about them;
they will be explained later.
You can \textsl{lean} on me!
You can lean on me!
right here!\newline
Thank you!
Please, start a new line right here!
Thank you!
1.3.4
When LATEX encounters a % character while processing an input file, it ignores
the rest of the present line, the line break, and all whitespace at the beginning
of the next line.
This can be used to write notes into the input file, which will not show
up in the printed version.
This is an % stupid
% Better: instructive <---example: Supercal%
ifragilist%
icexpialidocious
This is an example: Supercalifragilisticexpialidocious
The % character can also be used to split long input lines where no
whitespace or line breaks are allowed.
For longer comments you could use the comment environment provided by
the verbatim package. Add the line \usepackage{verbatim} to the preamble
of your document as explained below to use this command.
This is another
\begin{comment}
rather stupid,
\end{comment}
example for embedding
This is another example for embedding
Note that this won’t work inside complex environments, like math for
example.
1.4 Input File Structure
1.4
Input File Structure
When LATEX 2ε processes an input file, it expects it to follow a certain
\documentclass{...}
This specifies what sort of document you intend to write. After that, add
commands to influence the style of the whole document, or load packages
that add new features to the LATEX system. To load such a package you use
the command
\usepackage{...}
When all the setup work is done,4 you start the body of the text with
the command
\begin{document}
Now you enter the text mixed with some useful LATEX commands. At
the end of the document you add the
\end{document}
command, which tells LATEX to call it a day. Anything that follows this
command will be ignored by LATEX.
Figure 1.1 shows the contents of a minimal LATEX 2ε file. A slightly more
complicated input file is given in Figure 1.2.
1.5
A Typical Command Line Session
I bet you must be dying to try out the neat small LATEX input file shown
on page 7. Here is some help: LATEX itself comes without a GUI or fancy
buttons to press. It is just a program that crunches away at your input file.
Some LATEX installations feature a graphical front-end where there is a LATEX
button to start compiling your input file. On other systems there might be
4
The area between \documentclass and \begin{document} is called the preamble.
\documentclass{article}
\begin{document}
Small is beautiful.
\end{document}
Figure 1.1: A Minimal LATEX File.
7
8
Things You Need to Know
some typing involved, so here is how to coax LATEX into compiling your input
file on a text based system. Please note: this description assumes that a
1. Edit/Create your LATEX input file. This file must be plain ASCII text.
On Unix all the editors will create just that. On Windows you might
want to make sure that you save the file in ASCII or Plain Text format.
When picking a name for your file, make sure it bears the extension
.tex.
2. Open a shell or cmd window, cd to the directory where your input file
is located and run LATEX on your input file. If successful you will end
up with a .dvi file. It may be necessary to run LATEX several times to
input file has a bug LATEX will tell you about it and stop processing
your input file. Type ctrl-D to get back to the command line.
latex foo.tex
3. Now you may view the DVI file. There are several ways to do that.
5
This is the case with most well groomed Unix Systems, and . . . Real Men use Unix,
so . . . ;-)
\documentclass[a4paper,11pt]{article}
% define the title
\author{H.~Partl}
\title{Minimalism}
\begin{document}
% generates the title
\maketitle
\tableofcontents
\section{Some Interesting Words}
Well, and here begins my lovely article.
\section{Good Bye World}
\ldots{} and here it ends.
\end{document}
Figure 1.2: Example of a Realistic Journal Article. Note that all the
commands you see in this example will be explained later in the introduction.
1.6 The Layout of the Document
Look at the file on screen with
xdvi foo.dvi &
This only works on Unix with X11. If you are on Windows you might
want to try yap (yet another previewer).
Convert the dvi file to PostScript for printing or viewing with
GhostScript.
dvips -Pcmz foo.dvi -o foo.ps
If you are lucky your LATEX system even comes with the dvipdf tool,
which allows you to convert your .dvi files straight into pdf.
dvipdf foo.dvi
1.6
The Layout of the Document
1.6.1
Document Classes
The first information LATEX needs to know when processing an input file is
the type of document the author wants to create. This is specified with the
\documentclass command.
\documentclass[options]{class}
Here class specifies the type of document to be created. Table 1.1 lists the
document classes explained in this introduction. The LATEX 2ε distribution
provides additional classes for other documents, including letters and slides.
The options parameter customises the behaviour of the document class. The
options have to be separated by commas. The most common options for the
standard document classes are listed in Table 1.2.
Example: An input file for a LATEX document could start with the line
\documentclass[11pt,twoside,a4paper]{article}
which instructs LATEX to typeset the document as an article with a base
font size of eleven points, and to produce a layout suitable for double sided
printing on A4 paper.
9
10
Things You Need to Know
1.6.2
Packages
While writing your document, you will probably find that there are some
areas where basic LATEX cannot solve your problem. If you want to include
graphics, coloured text or source code from a file into your document, you
need to enhance the capabilities of LATEX. Such enhancements are called
packages. Packages are activated with the
\usepackage[options]{package}
command, where package is the name of the package and options is a list
of keywords that trigger special features in the package. The \usepackage
command goes into the preamble of the document. See section 1.4 for details.
Some packages come with the LATEX 2ε base distribution (See Table 1.3).
packages installed at your site in your Local Guide [5]. The prime source for
information about LATEX packages is The LATEX Companion [3]. It contains
descriptions on hundreds of packages, along with information of how to write
your own extensions to LATEX 2ε .
Modern TEX distributions come with a large number of packages preinstalled. If you are working on a Unix system, use the command texdoc for
accessing package documentation.
Table 1.1: Document Classes.
article for articles in scientific journals, presentations, short reports, program documentation, invitations, . . .
proc a class for proceedings based on the article class.
minimal is as small as it can get. It only sets a page size and a base font. It
is mainly used for debugging purposes.
report for longer reports containing several chapters, small books, PhD
theses, . . .
book for real books
slides for slides. The class uses big sans serif letters. You might want to
consider using the Beamer class instead.
1.6 The Layout of the Document
Table 1.2: Document Class Options.
10pt, 11pt, 12pt
Sets the size of the main font in the document. If no
option is specified, 10pt is assumed.
a4paper, letterpaper, . . .
Defines the paper size. The default size is
letterpaper. Besides that, a5paper, b5paper, executivepaper,
and legalpaper can be specified.
fleqn
Typesets displayed formulae left-aligned instead of centred.
leqno Places the numbering of formulae on the left hand side instead of
the right.
titlepage, notitlepage Specifies whether a new page should be started
after the document title or not. The article class does not start a
new page by default, while report and book do.
onecolumn, twocolumn Instructs LATEX to typeset the document in one
column or two columns.
twoside, oneside Specifies whether double or single sided output
should be generated. The classes article and report are single sided
and the book class is double sided by default. Note that this option
concerns the style of the document only. The option twoside does not
tell the printer you use that it should actually make a two-sided
printout.
landscape
mode.
Changes the layout of the document to print in landscape
openright, openany Makes chapters begin either only on right hand
pages or on the next page available. This does not work with the
article class, as it does not know about chapters. The report class
by default starts chapters on the next page available and the book
class starts them on right hand pages.
11
12
Things You Need to Know
Table 1.3: Some of the Packages Distributed with LATEX.
doc Allows the documentation of LATEX programs.
Described in doc.dtxa and in The LATEX Companion [3].
exscale Provides scaled versions of the math extension font.
Described in ltexscale.dtx.
fontenc Specifies which font encoding LATEX should use.
Described in ltoutenc.dtx.
ifthen Provides commands of the form
‘if. . . then do. . . otherwise do. . . .’
Described in ifthen.dtx and The LATEX Companion [3].
latexsym To access the LATEX symbol font, you should use the latexsym
package. Described in latexsym.dtx and in The LATEX Companion [3].
makeidx Provides commands for producing indexes. Described in section 4.3
and in The LATEX Companion [3].
syntonly Processes a document without typesetting it.
inputenc Allows the specification of an input encoding such as ASCII, ISO
Latin-1, ISO Latin-2, 437/850 IBM code pages, Apple Macintosh, Next,
ANSI-Windows or user-defined one. Described in inputenc.dtx.
a
This file should be installed on your system, and you should be able to get a dvi file
by typing latex doc.dtx in any directory where you have write permission. The same is
true for all the other files mentioned in this table.
1.7 Files You Might Encounter
1.6.3
Page Styles
LATEX supports three predefined header/footer combinations—so-called page
styles. The style parameter of the
\pagestyle{style}
command defines which one to use. Table 1.4 lists the predefined page styles.
Table 1.4: The Predefined Page Styles of LATEX.
plain prints the page numbers on the bottom of the page, in the middle of
the footer. This is the default page style.
headings prints the current chapter heading and the page number in the
header on each page, while the footer remains empty. (This is the style
used in this document)
empty sets both the header and the footer to be empty.
It is possible to change the page style of the current page with the
command
\thispagestyle{style}
A description how to create your own headers and footers can be found
in The LATEX Companion [3] and in section 4.4 on page 87.
1.7
Files You Might Encounter
When you work with LATEX you will soon find yourself in a maze of files
with various extensions and probably no clue. The following list explains the
various file types you might encounter when working with TEX. Please note
that this table does not claim to be a complete list of extensions, but if you
find one missing that you think is important, please drop me a line.
.tex LATEX or TEX input file. Can be compiled with latex.
.sty LATEX Macro package. Load this into your LATEX document using the
\usepackage command.
.dtx Documented TEX. This is the main distribution format for LATEX style
files. If you process a .dtx file you get documented macro code of the
LATEX package contained in the .dtx file.
13
14
Things You Need to Know
.ins The installer for the files contained in the matching .dtx file. If you
download a LATEX package from the net, you will normally get a .dtx
and a .ins file. Run LATEX on the .ins file to unpack the .dtx file.
.cls Class files define what your document looks like. They are selected
with the \documentclass command.
.fd Font description file telling LATEX about new fonts.
The following files are generated when you run LATEX on your input file:
.dvi Device Independent File. This is the main result of a LATEX compile
run. Look at its content with a DVI previewer program or send it to a
printer with dvips or a similar application.
.log Gives a detailed account of what happened during the last compiler
run.
.lof This is like .toc but for the list of figures.
.lot And again the same for the list of tables.
.aux Another file that transports information from one compiler run to the
next. Among other things, the .aux file is used to store information
associated with cross-references.
.idx If your document contains an index. LATEX stores all the words that
go into the index in this file. Process this file with makeindex. Refer
.ind The processed .idx file, ready for inclusion into your document on the
next compile cycle.
.ilg Logfile telling what makeindex did.
1.8
Big Projects
When working on big documents, you might want to split the input file into
several parts. LATEX has two commands that help you to do that.
\include{filename}
Use this command in the document body to insert the contents of another file
named filename.tex. Note that LATEX will start a new page before processing
the material input from filename.tex.
1.8 Big Projects
The second command can be used in the preamble. It allows you to
instruct LATEX to only input some of the \included files.
\includeonly{filename,filename,. . . }
After this command is executed in the preamble of the document, only
\include commands for the filenames that are listed in the argument of the
\includeonly command will be executed.
The \include command starts typesetting the included text on a new
page. This is helpful when you use \includeonly, because the page breaks
will not move, even when some include files are omitted. Sometimes this
might not be desirable. In this case, use the
\input{filename}
command. It simply includes the file specified. No flashy suits, no strings
attached.
To make LATEX quickly check your document use the syntonly package.
This makes LATEX skim through your document only checking for proper
syntax and usage of the commands, but doesn’t produce any (DVI) output.
As LATEX runs faster in this mode you may save yourself valuable time. Usage
is very simple:
\usepackage{syntonly}
\syntaxonly
When you want to produce pages, just comment out the second line (by
15
Chapter 2
Typesetting Text
After reading the previous chapter, you should know about the basic stuff of
which a LATEX 2ε document is made. In this chapter I will fill in the remaining
structure you will need to know in order to produce real world material.
2.1
The Structure of Text and Language
By Hanspeter Schmid <hanspi@schmid-werren.ch>
The main point of writing a text, is to convey ideas, information, or knowledge
to the reader. The reader will understand the text better if these ideas
are well-structured, and will see and feel this structure much better if the
typographical form reflects the logical and semantical structure of the content.
LATEX is different from other typesetting systems in that you just have
to tell it the logical and semantical structure of a text. It then derives the
typographical form of the text according to the “rules” given in the document
class file and in various style files.
The most important text unit in LATEX (and in typography) is the
paragraph. We call it “text unit” because a paragraph is the typographical
form that should reflect one coherent thought, or one idea. You will learn in
the following sections how to force line breaks with e.g. \\, and paragraph
breaks with e.g. leaving an empty line in the source code. Therefore, if a new
thought begins, a new paragraph should begin, and if not, only line breaks
as a conveyor of ideas and thoughts. If you have a paragraph break, but
the old thought continues, it should be removed. If some totally new line of
thought occurs in the same paragraph, then it should be broken.
Most people completely underestimate the importance of well-placed
paragraph breaks. Many people do not even know what the meaning of
a paragraph break is, or, especially in LATEX, introduce paragraph breaks
without knowing it. The latter mistake is especially easy to make if equations
are used in the text. Look at the following examples, and figure out why
18
Typesetting Text
sometimes empty lines (paragraph breaks) are used before and after the
equation, and sometimes not. (If you don’t yet understand all commands
well enough to understand these examples, please read this and the following
chapter, and then read this section again.)
% Example 1
\ldots when Einstein introduced his formula
$$e = m \cdot c^2 \; ,$$
which is at the same time the most widely known
and the least well understood physical formula.
% Example 2
\ldots from which follows Kirchhoff’s current law:
$$\sum_{k=1}^{n} I_k = 0 \; .$$
Kirchhoff’s voltage law can be derived \ldots
% Example 3
$$I_D = I_F - I_R$$
is the core of a very different transistor model. \ldots
The next smaller text unit is a sentence. In English texts, there is a
larger space after a period that ends a sentence than after one that ends an
abbreviation. LATEX tries to figure out which one you wanted to have. If
LATEX gets it wrong, you must tell it what you want. This is explained later
in this chapter.
The structuring of text even extends to parts of sentences. Most languages
have very complicated punctuation rules, but in many languages (including
German and English), you will get almost every comma right if you remember
what it represents: a short stop in the flow of language. If you are not sure
about where to put a comma, read the sentence aloud and take a short
breath at every comma. If this feels awkward at some place, delete that
comma; if you feel the urge to breathe (or make a short stop) at some other
place, insert a comma.
2.2 Line Breaking and Page Breaking
Finally, the paragraphs of a text should also be structured logically at a
higher level, by putting them into chapters, sections, subsections, and so on.
However, the typographical effect of writing e.g. \section{The Structure
of Text and Language} is so obvious that it is almost self-evident how
these high-level structures should be used.
2.2
2.2.1
Line Breaking and Page Breaking
Justified Paragraphs
Books are often typeset with each line having the same length. LATEX
inserts the necessary line breaks and spaces between words by optimizing
the contents of a whole paragraph. If necessary, it also hyphenates words
that would not fit comfortably on a line. How the paragraphs are typeset
depends on the document class. Normally the first line of a paragraph is
indented, and there is no additional space between two paragraphs. Refer to
In special cases it might be necessary to order LATEX to break a line:
\\ or \newline
starts a new line without starting a new paragraph.
\\*
additionally prohibits a page break after the forced line break.
\newpage
starts a new page.
\linebreak[n], \nolinebreak[n], \pagebreak[n], \nopagebreak[n]
suggest places where a break may (or may not) happen. They enable the
author to influence their actions with the optional argument n, which can
be set to a number between zero and four. By setting n to a value below
4, you leave LATEX the option of ignoring your command if the result would
look very bad. Do not confuse these “break” commands with the “new”
commands. Even when you give a “break” command, LATEX still tries to even
out the right border of the line and the total length of the page, as described
in the next section; this can lead to unpleasant gaps in your text. If you
really want to start a “new line” or a “new page”, then use the corresponding
command. Guess their names!
19
20
Typesetting Text
LATEX always tries to produce the best line breaks possible. If it cannot
find a way to break the lines in a manner that meets its high standards, it
lets one line stick out on the right of the paragraph. LATEX then complains
(“overfull hbox”) while processing the input file. This happens most often
when LATEX cannot find a suitable place to hyphenate a word.1 Instruct
LATEX to lower its standards a little by giving the \sloppy command. It
prevents such over-long lines by increasing the inter-word spacing—even if
the final output is not optimal. In this case a warning (“underfull hbox”) is
given to the user. In most such cases the result doesn’t look very good. The
command \fussy brings LATEX back to its default behaviour.
2.2.2
Hyphenation
LATEX hyphenates words whenever necessary. If the hyphenation algorithm
does not find the correct hyphenation points, remedy the situation by using
the following commands to tell TEX about the exception.
The command
\hyphenation{word list}
causes the words listed in the argument to be hyphenated only at the points
marked by “-”. The argument of the command should only contain words
built from normal letters, or rather signs that are considered to be normal
letters by LATEX. The hyphenation hints are stored for the language that
is active when the hyphenation command occurs. This means that if you
place a hyphenation command into the preamble of your document it will
influence the English language hyphenation. If you place the command
after the \begin{document} and you are using some package for national
language support like babel, then the hyphenation hints will be active in the
language activated through babel.
The example below will allow “hyphenation” to be hyphenated as well as
“Hyphenation”, and it prevents “FORTRAN”, “Fortran” and “fortran” from
being hyphenated at all. No special characters or symbols are allowed in the
argument.
Example:
\hyphenation{FORTRAN Hy-phen-a-tion}
The command \- inserts a discretionary hyphen into a word. This
also becomes the only point hyphenation is allowed in this word. This
command is especially useful for words containing special characters (e.g.
1
Although LATEX gives you a warning when that happens (Overfull \hbox) and displays
the offending line, such lines are not always easy to find. If you use the option draft in
the \documentclass command, these lines will be marked with a thick black line on the
right margin.
21
accented characters), because LATEX does not automatically hyphenate words
containing special characters.
I think this is: su\-per\-cal\-%
i\-frag\-i\-lis\-tic\-ex\-pi\-%
al\-i\-do\-cious
I think this is: supercalifragilisticexpialidocious
Several words can be kept together on one line with the command
\mbox{text}
It causes its argument to be kept together under all circumstances.
My phone number will change soon.
It will be \mbox{0116 291 2319}.
The parameter
\mbox{\emph{filename}} should
contain the name of the file.
My phone number will change soon. It will
be 0116 291 2319.
The parameter filename should contain the
name of the file.
\fbox is similar to \mbox, but in addition there will be a visible box
drawn around the content.
2.3
In some of the examples on the previous pages, you have seen some very
simple LATEX commands for typesetting special text strings:
Command
\today
\TeX
\LaTeX
\LaTeXe
2.4
2.4.1
Example
June 20, 2016
TEX
LATEX
LATEX 2ε
Description
Current date
The Name of the Game
The current incarnation
Special Characters and Symbols
Quotation Marks
You should not use the " for quotation marks as you would on a typewriter.
In publishing there are special opening and closing quotation marks. In LATEX,
use two  (grave accent) for opening quotation marks and two ' (vertical
quote) for closing quotation marks. For single quotes you use just one of
each.
22
Typesetting Text
Yes I know the rendering is not ideal, it’s really a back-tick or grave
accent () for opening quotes and vertical quote (') for closing, despite what
the font chosen might suggest.
2.4.2
Dashes and Hyphens
LATEX knows four kinds of dashes. Access three of them with different number
of consecutive dashes. The fourth sign is actually not a dash at all—it is the
mathematical minus sign:
daughter-in-law, X-rated\\
pages 13--67\\
yes---or no? \\
$0$, $1$ and $-1$
daughter-in-law, X-rated
pages 13–67
yes—or no?
0, 1 and −1
The names for these dashes are: ‘-’ hyphen, ‘–’ en-dash, ‘—’ em-dash
and ‘−’ minus sign.
2.4.3
Tilde (∼)
A character often seen in web addresses is the tilde. To generate this in
LATEX use \~{} but the result (˜) is not really what you want. Try this
http://www.rich.edu/\~{}bush \\
http://www.clever.edu/$\sim$demo
2.4.4
http://www.rich.edu/˜bush
http://www.clever.edu/∼demo
Slash (/)
In order to typeset a slash between two words, one can simply type e.g.
read/write, but this makes LATEX treat the two words as one. Hyphenation
is disabled for these two words, so there may be ‘overfull’ errors. To overcome this, use \slash. For example type ‘read\slash write’ which allows
hyphenation. But normal ‘/’ character may be still used for ratios or units,
e.g. 5 MB/s.
2.4.5
Degree Symbol (◦)
Printing the degree symbol in pure LATEX.
It’s $-30\,^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$.
I will soon start to
super-conduct.
It’s −30 ◦ C. I will soon start to superconduct.
2.4 Special Characters and Symbols
23
The textcomp package makes the degree symbol also available as \textdegree
or in combination with the C by using the \textcelsius.
30 \textcelsius{} is
86 \textdegree{}F.
2.4.6
30 ℃ is 86 °F.
The Euro Currency Symbol (e)
When writing about money these days, you need the Euro symbol. Many
current fonts contain a Euro symbol. After loading the textcomp package in
\usepackage{textcomp}
use the command
\texteuro
to access it.
If your font does not provide its own Euro symbol or if you do not like
the font’s Euro symbol, you have two more choices:
First the eurosym package. It provides the official Euro symbol:
\usepackage[official]{eurosym}
If you prefer a Euro symbol that matches your font, use the option gen
in place of the official option.
Table 2.1: A bag full of Euro symbols
2.4.7
LM+textcomp
\texteuro
eurosym
\euro
[gen]eurosym
\euro
€ € €
e e e
A
C A
C A
C
Ellipsis (. . . )
On a typewriter, a comma or a period takes the same amount of space as
any other letter. In book printing, these characters occupy only a little space
and are set very close to the preceding letter. Therefore, entering ‘ellipsis’
24
Typesetting Text
by just typing three dots would produce the wrong result. Instead, there is
a special command for these dots. It is called
\ldots (low dots)
Not like this ... but like this:\\
New York, Tokyo, Budapest, \ldots
2.4.8
Not like this ... but like this:
New York, Tokyo, Budapest, . . .
Ligatures
Some letter combinations are typeset not just by setting the different letters
one after the other, but by actually using special symbols.
ff fi fl ffi. . .
ff fi fl ffi . . .
These so-called ligatures can be prohibited by inserting an \mbox{} between
the two letters in question. This might be necessary with words built from
two words.
\Large Not shelfful\\
but shelf\mbox{}ful
2.4.9
Not shelfful
but shelfful
Accents and Special Characters
LATEX supports the use of accents and special characters from many languages.
Table 2.2 shows all sorts of accents being applied to the letter o. Naturally
other letters work too.
To place an accent on top of an i or a j, its dots have to be removed.
This is accomplished by typing \i and \j.
H\^otel, na\"\i ve, \’el\‘eve,\\
sm\o rrebr\o d, !‘Se\~norita!,\\
Sch\"onbrunner Schlo\ss{}
Stra\ss e
2.5
Hôtel, naïve, élève,
smørrebrød, ¡Señorita!,
Schönbrunner Schloß Straße
International Language Support
When you write documents in languages other than English, there are three
areas where LATEX has to be configured appropriately:
2.5 International Language Support
25
1. All automatically generated text strings2 have to be adapted to the
new language. For many languages, these changes can be accomplished
by using the babel package by Johannes Braams.
2. LATEX needs to know the hyphenation rules for the new language.
Getting hyphenation rules into LATEX is a bit more tricky. It means
rebuilding the format file with different hyphenation patterns enabled.
3. Language specific typographic rules. In French for example, there is a
mandatory space before each colon character (:).
\usepackage[language]{babel}
after the \documentclass command. A list of the languages built into your
LATEX system will be displayed every time the compiler is started. Babel will
automatically activate the appropriate hyphenation rules for the language
you choose. If your LATEX format does not support hyphenation in the
language of your choice, babel will still work but will disable hyphenation,
which has quite a negative effect on the appearance of the typeset document.
Babel also specifies new commands for some languages, which simplify
the input of special characters. The German language, for example, contains
a lot of umlauts (äöü). With babel loaded, enter an ö by typing "o instead
of \"o.
2
Table 2.2: Accents and Special Characters.
ò
ō
\‘o
\=o
ó
ȯ
\’o
\.o
ô
ö
\^o
\"o
õ
ç
\~o
\c c
ŏ
o.
\u o
\d o
\v o
\b o
ő
oo
\H o
\t oo
o̧
\c o
œ
å
\oe
\aa
ǒ
o
¯
Œ
Å
\OE
\AA
æ
\ae
Æ
\AE
ø
ı
\o
\i
Ø

\O
\j
ł
¡
\l
!‘
Ł
¿
\L
?‘
26
Typesetting Text
If you call babel with multiple languages
\usepackage[languageA,languageB]{babel}
then the last language in the option list will be active (i.e. languageB). Use
the command
\selectlanguage{languageA}
to change the active language.
Most modern computer systems allow you to input letters of national
alphabets directly from the keyboard. In order to handle a variety of input
encodings used for different groups of languages and/or on different computer
platforms LATEX employs the inputenc package:
\usepackage[encoding]{inputenc}
When using this package, you should consider that other people might
not be able to display your input files on their computer, because they use a
different encoding. For example, the German umlaut ä on OS/2 is encoded
as 132, on Unix systems using ISO-LATIN 1 it is encoded as 228, while
in Cyrillic encoding cp1251 for Windows this letter does not exist at all;
therefore you should use this feature with care. The following encodings may
come in handy, depending on the type of system you are working on3
Operating
system
Mac
Unix
Windows
DOS, OS/2
encodings
western Latin
Cyrillic
applemac
macukr
latin1
koi8-ru
ansinew
cp1251
cp850 cp866nav
\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
will enable you to create LATEX input files in utf8, a multi-byte encoding in
which each character can be encoded in as little as one byte and as many as
four bytes.
Since the turn of the Century most Operating Systems are based on
Unicode (Windows XP, MacOS X). Therefore it is recommended to use utf8
for any new project. The utf8 encoding used by inputenc only defines the
3
languages, read the documentation for inputenc.dtx and cyinpenc.dtx respectively.
Section 4.6 tells how to produce package documentation.
2.5 International Language Support
characters that are actually provided by the fonts used. If you need more
(non-latin) characters have a look at XELATEX in section 4.8 a Unicode based
TEX-engine.
Font encoding is a different matter. It defines at which position inside a
TEX-font each letter is stored. Multiple input encodings could be mapped
into one font encoding, which reduces the number of required font sets. Font
encodings are handled through fontenc package:
\usepackage[encoding]{fontenc}
where encoding is font encoding. It is possible to load several encodings
simultaneously.
The default LATEX font encoding is OT1, the encoding of the original
Computer Modern TEX font. It contains only the 128 characters of the 7-bit
ASCII character set. When accented characters are required, TEX creates
them by combining a normal character with an accent. While the resulting
output looks perfect, this approach stops the automatic hyphenation from
working inside words containing accented characters. Besides, some Latin
letters could not be created by combining a normal character with an accent,
to say nothing about letters of non-Latin alphabets, such as Greek or Cyrillic.
To overcome these shortcomings, several 8-bit CM-like font sets were
created. Extended Cork (EC) fonts in T1 encoding contains letters$$and$$punctuation characters for most of the European languages using Latin
script. The LH font set contains letters necessary to typeset documents
in languages using Cyrillic script. Because of the large number of Cyrillic
glyphs, they are arranged into four font encodings—T2A, T2B, T2C, and X2.4
The CB bundle contains fonts in LGR encoding for the composition of Greek
text.
Improve/enable hyphenation in non-English documents by using these
fonts. Another advantage of using new CM-like fonts is that they provide
fonts of CM families in all weights, shapes, and optically scaled font sizes.
2.5.1
Support for Portuguese
By Demerson Andre Polli <polli@linux.ime.usp.br>
To enable hyphenation and change all automatic text to Portuguese, use the
command:
\usepackage[portuguese]{babel}
Or if you are in Brazil, substitute brazilian as the language.
4
Find a list of languages supported by each of these encodings in [11].
27
28
Typesetting Text
Table 2.3: Preamble for Portuguese documents.
\usepackage[portuguese]{babel}
\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
As there are a lot of accents in Portuguese you might want to use
\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
to be able to input them correctly as well as
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
to get the hyphenation right.
See table 2.3 for the preamble you need to write in the Portuguese
language. Note that the example is for the latin1 input encoding. Modern
systems might be using utf8 instead.
2.5.2
Support for French
By Daniel Flipo <daniel.flipo@univ-lille1.fr>
Some hints for those creating French documents with LATEX: load French
language support with the following command:
\usepackage[francais]{babel}
This enables French hyphenation, if you have configured your LATEX
system accordingly. It also changes all automatic text into French: \chapter
prints Chapitre, \today prints the current date in French and so on. A set
of new commands also becomes available, which allows you to write French
input files more easily. Check out table 2.4 for inspiration.
You will also notice that the layout of lists changes when switching to the
French language. For more information on what the francais option of babel
does and how to customize its behaviour, run LATEX on file frenchb.dtx
and read the produced file frenchb.dvi.
command.
2.5 International Language Support
29
Table 2.4: Special commands for French.
2.5.3
\og guillemets \fg{}
« guillemets »
M\up{me}, D\up{r}
Mme, Dr
1\ier{}, 1\iere{}, 1\ieres{}
1er, 1re, 1res
2\ieme{} 4\iemes{}
2e 4es
\No 1, \no 2
No 1, no 2
20~\degres C, 45\degres
20 °C, 45°
\bsc{M. Durand}
M. Durand
\nombre{1234,56789}
1 234,567 89
Support for German
Some hints for those creating German documents with LATEX: load German
language support with the following command:
\usepackage[german]{babel}
This enables German hyphenation, if you have configured your LATEX
system accordingly. It also changes all automatic text into German. Eg.
“Chapter” becomes “Kapitel.” A set of new commands also becomes available,
which allows you to write German input files more quickly even when you
don’t use the inputenc package. Check out table 2.5 for inspiration. With
inputenc, all this becomes moot, but your text also is locked in a particular
encoding world.
Table 2.5: German Special Characters.
"a
ä
"s
ß
"‘
„
"’
“
"< or \flqq
«
"> or \frqq
»
\flq
‹
\frq
›
\dq
"
In German books you often find French quotation marks («guillemets»).
German typesetters, however, use them differently. A quote in a German
30
Typesetting Text
book would look like »this«. In the German speaking part of Switzerland,
typesetters use «guillemets» the same way the French do.
A major problem arises from the use of commands like \flq: If you use
the OT1 font (which is the default font) the guillemets will look like the math
symbol “”, which turns a typesetter’s stomach. T1 encoded fonts, on the
other hand, do contain the required symbols. So if you are using this type of
quote, make sure you use the T1 encoding. (\usepackage[T1]{fontenc})
2.5.4
Support for Korean5
To process Hangul6 characters or prepare a document written in Korean
using LATEX, put the following code in the preamble of the document.
\usepackage{kotex}
A document containing the declaration above will have to be processed
by pdfLATEX, XELATEX, or LuaLATEX. Make sure that the input file written in
Hangul is encoded in Unicode UTF-8. The package called ko.TEX7 is under
continuous development by the Korean TEX Users Group8 and the Korean
TEX Society.9 Many people use this package to create Korean documents for
their everyday needs. ko.TEX has been available on CTAN since 2014. It
is included TEX Live, MiKTEX and other modern TEX distributions. So in
all likelihood you can start working right away without installing any extra
packages.
ko.TEX does not use the babel package. Many functions related to
Korean can be activated using the options and configuration commands
provided by the kotex package. If you want to compose a real world Korean
document, you are advised to consult the package documentation (These
documents are written in Korean).
With ko.TEX, you also get oblivoir, a memoir-based document class,
tailored for Korean document preparation. So your Korean document would
start like this:
\documentclass{oblivoir}
To generate an index for a Korean document, execute komkindex instead
of makeindex. It is a version of the makeindex utility modified for Korean
5
Written by Karnes Kim <karnes@ktug.org> and Kihwang Lee <leekh@ktug.org> on
behalf of the Korean TEX Users Group and the Korean TEX Society.
6
Hangul is the name of the Korean writing system. Refer to http://en.wikipedia.
7
Reads “Korean TEX”. ko.TEX is the name of a collection of packages including cjk-ko,
kotex-utf, xetexko, and luatexko.
8
http://ktug.org
9
http://ktug.kr
2.5 International Language Support
Table 2.6: Preamble for Greek documents.
\usepackage[english,greek]{babel}
\usepackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}
processing. For lexicographical sorting of the Korean index items, you can
use index style kotex.ist provided by ko.TEX as follows:
komkindex -s kotex foo.idx
You can also use xindy for index generation as the Korean module for
xindy is included in TEX Live.
There is another Korean/Hangul typesetting package called CJK. As
the name of the package suggests, it has facilities for typesetting Chinese,
Japanese, and Korean characters. It supports multiple encodings of the CJK
characters. The following is a simple example of typesetting UTF-8 encoded
Hangul using CJK package. It is useful when you submit a manuscript
to some academic journals that allow typesetting author names in native
languages.
\usepackage{CJK}
\begin{CJK}{UTF8}{}
\CJKfamily{nanummj}
...
\end{CJK}
2.5.5
Writing in Greek
By Nikolaos Pothitos <pothitos@di.uoa.gr>
See table 2.6 for the preamble you need to write in the Greek language. This
preamble enables hyphenation and changes all automatic text to Greek.10
A set of new commands also becomes available, which allows you to
write Greek input files more easily. In order to temporarily switch to
English and vice versa, one can use the commands \textlatin{english text}
and \textgreek{greek text} that both take one argument which is then
typeset using the requested font encoding. Otherwise use the command
\selectlanguage{...} described in a previous section. Check out table 2.7
for some Greek punctuation characters. Use \euro for the Euro symbol.
10
If you select the utf8x option for the package inputenc, LATEX will understand Greek
and polytonic Greek Unicode characters.
31
32
Typesetting Text
Table 2.7: Greek Special Characters.
;
((
‘‘
2.5.6
?
;
«
))
»
‘
’’
’
·
Support for Cyrillic
By Maksym Polyakov <polyama@myrealbox.com>
Version 3.7h of babel includes support for the T2* encodings and for typesetting Bulgarian, Russian and Ukrainian texts using Cyrillic letters.
Support for Cyrillic is based on standard LATEX mechanisms plus the
fontenc and inputenc packages. But, if you are going to use Cyrillics in math
mode, you need to load mathtext package before fontenc:11
\usepackage{mathtext}
\usepackage[T1,T2A]{fontenc}
\usepackage[koi8-ru]{inputenc}
\usepackage[english,bulgarian,russian,ukranian]{babel}
Generally, babel will automatically choose the default font encoding, for
the above three languages this is T2A. However, documents are not restricted
to a single font encoding. For multi-lingual documents using Cyrillic$$and$$Latin-based languages it makes sense to include Latin font encoding explicitly.
babel will take care of switching to the appropriate font encoding when a
different language is selected within the document.
In addition to enabling hyphenations, translating automatically generated text strings, and activating some language specific typographic rules
(like \frenchspacing), babel provides some commands allowing typesetting
according to the standards of Bulgarian, Russian, or Ukrainian languages.
For all three languages, language specific punctuation is provided: The
Cyrillic dash for the text (it is little narrower than Latin dash and surrounded
by tiny spaces), a dash for direct speech, quotes, and commands to facilitate
hyphenation, see Table 2.8.
The Russian and Ukrainian options of babel define the commands \Asbuk
and \asbuk, which act like \Alph and \alph12 , but produce capital$$and$$small letters of Russian or Ukrainian alphabets (whichever is the active
language of the document). The Bulgarian option of babel provides the
commands \enumBul and \enumLat (\enumEng), which make \Alph$$and$$11
12
If you use AMS-LATEX packages, load them before fontenc and babel as well.
the commands for turning counters into a, b, c, . . .
2.5 International Language Support
Table 2.8: The extra definitions made by Bulgarian, Russian, and Ukrainian
options of babel
"|
disable ligature at this position.
"an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation in the rest of the word.
"--- Cyrillic emdash in plain text.
"--~ Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames).
"--* Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech.
""
like "-, but producing no hyphen sign (for compound words with
hyphen, e.g. x-""y or some other signs as “disable/enable”).
"~
for a compound word mark without a breakpoint.
for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing hyphenation
"=
in the composing words.
",
thinspace for initials with a breakpoint in following surname.
"‘
for German left double quotes (looks like ,,).
"’
for German right double quotes (looks like “).
"<
for French left double quotes (looks like <<).
">
for French right double quotes (looks like >>).
\alph produce letters of either Bulgarian or Latin (English) alphabets. The
default behaviour of \Alph and \alph for the Bulgarian language option is
to produce letters from the Bulgarian alphabet.
2.5.7
Support for Mongolian
To use LATEX for typesetting Mongolian you have a choice between two
packages: Multilingual Babel and MonTEX by Oliver Corff.
MonTEX includes support for both Cyrillic and traditional Mongolian
Script. In order to access the commands of MonTEX, add:
\usepackage[language,encoding]{mls}
to the preamble. Choose the language option xalx to generate captions
and dates in Modern Mongolian. To write a complete document in the
traditional Mongolian script you have to choose bicig for the language option.
The document language option bicig enables the “Simplified Transliteration”
input method.
33
34
Typesetting Text
Enable and disable Latin Transliteration Mode with
\SetDocumentEncodingLMC
and
\SetDocumentEncodingNeutral
mongolian/montex/doc.
Mongolian Cyrillic script is supported by babel. Activate Mongolian
language support with the following commands:
\usepackage[T2A]{fontenc}
\usepackage[mn]{inputenc}
\usepackage[mongolian]{babel}
where mn is the cp1251 input encoding. For a more modern approach invoke
2.5.8
The Unicode option
By Axel Kielhorn <A.Kielhorn@web.de>
Unicode is the way to go if you want to include several languages in one
document, especially when these languages are not using the latin script.
There are two TEX-engines that are capable of processing Unicode input:
XETEX was developed for MacOS X but is now available for all architectures.
It was first included into TexLive 2007.
LuaTEX is the successor of pdfTEX. It was first included into TexLive 2008.
The following describes XELATEX as distributed with TexLive 2010.
Quickstart
To convert an existing LATEX file to XELATEX the following needs to be done:
1. Save the file as UTF-8
2. Remove
\usepackage{inputenc}
\usepackage{fontenc}
\usepackage{textcomp}
from the preamble.
2.5 International Language Support
3. Change
\usepackage[languageA]{babel}
to
\usepackage{polyglossia}
\setdefaultlanguage[babelshorthands]{languageA}
\usepackage[Ligatures=TeX]{fontspec}
to the preamble.
The package polyglossia[19] is a replacement for babel. It takes care of
the hyphenation patterns and automatically generated text strings. The
option babelshorthands enables babel compatible shorthands for german
and catalan.
The default font is Latin Modern Roman. It is a little known fact that some
TEX command are ligatures defined in the Computer Modern fonts. If you
want to use them with a non-TEX font, you have to fake them. The option
Ligatures=TeX defines the following ligatures:
-–
--- —
’’
”
‘‘
“
!‘
¡
?‘
¿
,,
„
<<
«
>>
»
It’s all Γρκ to me
So far there has been no advantage to using a Unicode TEX engine. This
changes when we leave the Latin script and move to a more interesting
language like Greek or Russian. With a Unicode based system, you can
simply13 enter the characters in your editor and TEX will understand them.
13
For small values of simple.
35
36
Typesetting Text
Writing in different languages is easy, just specify the languages in the
preamble:
\setdefaultlanguage{english}
\setotherlanguage[babelshorthands]{german}
To write a paragraph in German, you can use the German environment:
English text.
\begin{german}
Deutscher Text.
\end{german}
More English text.
If you just need a word in a foreign language you can use the \textlanguage
command:
Englisch text. \textgerman{Gesundheit} is actually a German word.
This may look unnecessary since the only advantage is a correct hyphenation, but when the second language is a little bit more exotic it will be
worth the effort.
Sometimes the font used in the main document does not contain glyphs
that are required in the second language14 . The solution is to define a font
that will be used for that language. Whenever a new language is activated,
polyglossia will first check whether a font has been defined for that language.
\newfontfamily\russianfont[Script=Cyrillic,(...)]{(font)}
Now you can write
\textrussian{Pravda} is a russian newspaper.
Since this document is written in Latin1-encoding, I cannot show the
actual Cyrillic letters.
The package xgreek[22] offers support for writing either ancient or modern
(monotonic or polytonic) greek.
Right to Left (RTL) languages.
Some languages are written left to right, others are written right to left(RTL).
polyglossia needs the bidi[23] package15 in order to support RTL languages.
The bidi package should be the last package you load, even after hyperref
14
15
Latin Modern does not contain Cyrillic letters
bidi does not support LuaTEX.
2.5 International Language Support
which is usually the last package. (Since polyglossia loads bidi this means
that polyglossia should be the last package loaded.)
The package xepersian[24] offers support for the Persian language. It
supplies Persian LATEX-commands that allows you to enter commands like
\section in Persian, which makes this really attractive to native speakers.
xepersian is the only package that supports kashida with XELATEX. A package
for Syriac which uses a similar algorithm is under development.
The IranNastaliq font provided by the SCICT16 is available at their
website http://www.scict.ir/Portal/Home/Default.aspx.
The arabxetex[20] package supports several languages with an Arabic
script:
• arab (Arabic)
• persian
• urdu
• sindhi
• pashto
• ottoman (turk)
• kurdish
• kashmiri
• malay (jawi)
• uighur
It offers a font mapping that enables XELATEX to process input using the
ArabTEX ASCII transcription.
Fonts that support several Arabic laguages are offered by the IRMUG17
at http://wiki.irmug.org/index.php/X_Series_2.
There is no package available for Hebrew because none is needed. The
Hebrew support in polyglossia should be sufficient. But you do need a
suitable font with real Unicode Hebrew. SBL Hebrew is free for noncommercial use and available at http://www.sbl-site.org/educational/
biblicalfonts.aspx. Another font available under the Open Font License
is Ezra SIL, available at http://www.sil.org/computing/catalog/show_
software.asp?id=76.
16
17
Supreme Council of Information and Communication Technology
Iranian Mac User Group
37
38
Typesetting Text
Remember to select the correct script:
\newfontfamily\hebrewfont[Script=Hebrew]{SBL Hebrew}
\newfontfamily\hebrewfont[Script=Hebrew]{Ezra SIL}
Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
The package xeCJK[25] takes care of font selection and punctuation for these
languages.
2.6
The Space Between Words
To get a straight right margin in the output, LATEX inserts varying amounts
of space between the words. It inserts slightly more space at the end of a
sentence, as this makes the text more readable. LATEX assumes that sentences
end with periods, question marks or exclamation marks. If a period follows
an uppercase letter, this is not taken as a sentence ending, since periods after
uppercase letters normally occur in abbreviations.
Any exception from these assumptions has to be specified by the author.
A backslash in front of a space generates a space that will not be enlarged. A
tilde ‘~’ character generates a space that cannot be enlarged and additionally
prohibits a line break. The command \@ in front of a period specifies that
this period terminates a sentence even when it follows an uppercase letter.
Mr.~Smith was happy to see her\\
cf.~Fig.~5\\
I like BASIC\@. What about you?
Mr. Smith was happy to see her
cf. Fig. 5
I like BASIC. What about you?
The additional space after periods can be disabled with the command
\frenchspacing
which tells LATEX not to insert more space after a period than after an
ordinary character. This is very common in non-English languages, except
bibliographies. If you use \frenchspacing, the command \@ is not necessary.
2.7
Titles, Chapters, and Sections
To help the reader find his or her way through your work, you should divide
it into chapters, sections, and subsections. LATEX supports this with special
2.7 Titles, Chapters, and Sections
commands that take the section title as their argument. It is up to you to
use them in the correct order.
The following sectioning commands are available for the article class:
\section{...}
\subsection{...}
\subsubsection{...}
\paragraph{...}
\subparagraph{...}
If you want to split your document into parts without influencing the
section or chapter numbering use
\part{...}
When you work with the report or book class, an additional top-level
sectioning command becomes available
\chapter{...}
As the article class does not know about chapters, it is quite easy
to add articles as chapters to a book. The spacing between sections, the
numbering and the font size of the titles will be set automatically by LATEX.
Two of the sectioning commands are a bit special:
• The \part command does not influence the numbering sequence of
chapters.
• The \appendix command does not take an argument. It just changes
the chapter numbering to letters.18
numbers from the last compile cycle of the document. The command
\tableofcontents
Sometimes it might be necessary to compile the document a third time.
LATEX will tell you when this is necessary.
All sectioning commands listed above also exist as “starred” versions. A
“starred” version of a command is built by adding a star * after the command
name. This generates section headings that do not show up in the table
18
For the article style it changes the section numbering.
39
40
Typesetting Text
of contents and are not numbered. The command \section{Help}, for
example, would become \section*{Help}.
as they are entered in the text. Sometimes this is not possible, because the
of contents can then be specified as an optional argument in front of the
and especially boring title, shown in the text}
The title of the whole document is generated by issuing a
\maketitle
command. The contents of the title have to be defined by the commands
\title{...}, \author{...} and optionally \date{...}
before calling \maketitle. In the argument to \author, you can supply
several names separated by \and commands.
An example of some of the commands mentioned above can be found in
Figure 1.2 on page 8.
Apart from the sectioning commands explained above, LATEX 2ε introduced three additional commands for use with the book class. They are
and page numbering to work as you would expect in a book:
\frontmatter should be the very first command after the start of the
document body (\begin{document}). It will switch page numbering
to Roman numerals and sections will be non-enumerated as if you were
using the starred sectioning commands (eg \chapter*{Preface}) but
\mainmatter comes right before the first chapter of the book. It turns on
Arabic page numbering and restarts the page counter.
\appendix marks the start of additional material in your book. After this
command chapters will be numbered with letters.
\backmatter should be inserted before the very last items in your book,
such as the bibliography and the index. In the standard document
classes, this has no visual effect.
2.8 Cross References
2.8
41
Cross References
In books, reports and articles, there are often cross-references to figures,
tables and special segments of text. LATEX provides the following commands
for cross referencing
\label{marker}, \ref{marker} and \pageref{marker}
where marker is an identifier chosen by the user. LATEX replaces \ref by
the number of the section, subsection, figure, table, or theorem after which
the corresponding \label command was issued. \pageref prints the page
number of the page where the \label command occurred.19 As with section
previous compile cycle are used.
A reference to this subsection
\label{sec:this} looks like:
‘‘see section~\ref{sec:this} on
page~\pageref{sec:this}.’’
2.9
A reference to this subsection looks like:
“see section 2.8 on page 41.”
Footnotes
With the command
\footnote{footnote text}
a footnote is printed at the foot of the current page. Footnotes should always
be put20 after the word or sentence they refer to. Footnotes referring to a
sentence or part of it should therefore be put after the comma or period.21
Footnotes\footnote{This is
a footnote.} are often used
by people using \LaTeX.
19
Footnotesa are often used by people using
LATEX.
a
This is a footnote.
Note that these commands are not aware of what they refer to. \label just saves the
last automatically generated number.
20
“put” is one of the most common English words.
21
Note that footnotes distract the reader from the main body of your document. After
all, everybody reads the footnotes—we are a curious species, so why not just integrate
everything you want to say into the body of the document?22
22
A guidepost doesn’t necessarily go where it’s pointing to :-).
42
Typesetting Text
2.10
Emphasized Words
If a text is typed using a typewriter, important words are emphasized by
underlining them.
\underline{text}
In printed books, however, words are emphasized by typesetting them in
an italic font. As an author you shouldn’t care either way. The important
bit is, to tell LATEX that a particular bit of text is important and should be
emphasized. Hence the command
\emph{text}
to emphasize text. What the command actually does with its argument
depends on the context:
\emph{If you use
emphasizing inside a piece
of emphasized text, then
\LaTeX{} uses the
\emph{normal} font for
emphasizing.}
If you use emphasizing inside a piece of
emphasized text, then LATEX uses the normal font for emphasizing.
If you want control over font and font size, section 6.2 on page 123 might
provide some inspiration.
2.11
Environments
\begin{environment}
text
\end{environment}
Where environment is the name of the environment. Environments can be
nested within each other as long as the correct nesting order is maintained.
\begin{aaa}...\begin{bbb}...\end{bbb}...\end{aaa}
In the following sections all important environments are explained.
2.11.1
Itemize, Enumerate, and Description
The itemize environment is suitable for simple lists, the enumerate environment for enumerated lists, and the description environment for descriptions.
2.11 Environments
\flushleft
\begin{enumerate}
\item You can nest the list
\begin{itemize}
\item But it might start to
look silly.
\item[-] With a dash.
\end{itemize}
\item Therefore remember:
\begin{description}
\item[Stupid] things will not
become smart because they are
in a list.
\item[Smart] things, though,
can be presented beautifully
in a list.
\end{description}
\end{enumerate}
2.11.2
43
1. You can nest the list environments
• But it might start to look
silly.
- With a dash.
2. Therefore remember:
Stupid things will not become
smart because they are in a
list.
Smart things, though, can be
presented beautifully in a list.
Flushleft, Flushright, and Center
The environments flushleft and flushright generate paragraphs that
are either left- or right-aligned. The center environment generates centred
text. If you do not issue \\ to specify line breaks, LATEX will automatically
determine line breaks.
\begin{flushleft}
This text is\\ left-aligned.
\LaTeX{} is not trying to make
each line the same length.
\end{flushleft}
This text is
left-aligned. LATEX is not trying to make
each line the same length.
\begin{flushright}
This text is right-\\aligned.
\LaTeX{} is not trying to make
each line the same length.
\end{flushright}
This text is rightaligned. LATEX is not trying to make each
line the same length.
\begin{center}
At the centre\\of the earth
\end{center}
At the centre
of the earth
44
Typesetting Text
2.11.3
Quote, Quotation, and Verse
The quote environment is useful for quotes, important phrases and examples.
A typographical rule of thumb
for the line length is:
\begin{quote}
On average, no line should
be longer than 66 characters.
\end{quote}
This is why \LaTeX{} pages have
such large borders by default
and also why multicolumn print
is used in newspapers.
A typographical rule of thumb for the line
length is:
On average, no line should be
longer than 66 characters.
This is why LATEX pages have such large
borders by default and also why multicolumn print is used in newspapers.
There are two similar environments: the quotation and the verse environments. The quotation environment is useful for longer quotes going over
several paragraphs, because it indents the first line of each paragraph. The
verse environment is useful for poems where the line breaks are important.
The lines are separated by issuing a \\ at the end of a line and an empty
line after each verse.
I know only one English poem by
heart. It is about Humpty Dumpty.
\begin{flushleft}
\begin{verse}
Humpty Dumpty sat on a wall:\\
Humpty Dumpty had a great fall.\\
All the King’s horses and all
the King’s men\\
Couldn’t put Humpty together
again.
\end{verse}
\end{flushleft}
2.11.4
I know only one English poem by heart. It
Humpty Dumpty sat on a
wall:
fall.
All the King’s horses and all
the King’s men
Couldn’t put Humpty
together again.
Abstract
In scientific publications it is customary to start with an abstract which gives
the reader a quick overview of what to expect. LATEX provides the abstract
environment for this purpose. Normally abstract is used in documents
typeset with the article document class.
\begin{abstract}
The abstract abstract.
\end{abstract}
The abstract abstract.
2.11 Environments
2.11.5
45
Printing Verbatim
Text that is enclosed between \begin{verbatim} and \end{verbatim} will
be directly printed, as if typed on a typewriter, with all line breaks$$and$$spaces, without any LATEX command being executed.
Within a paragraph, similar behavior can be accessed with
\verb+text+
The + is just an example of a delimiter character. Use any character except
letters, * or space. Many LATEX examples in this booklet are typeset with
this command.
The \verb|\ldots| command \ldots
The \ldots command . . .
\begin{verbatim}
10 PRINT "HELLO WORLD ";
20 GOTO 10
\end{verbatim}
10 PRINT "HELLO WORLD ";
20 GOTO 10
\begin{verbatim*}
the starred version of
the
verbatim
environment emphasizes
the spaces
in the text
\end{verbatim*}
the␣starred␣version␣of
the␣␣␣␣␣␣verbatim
environment␣emphasizes
the␣spaces␣␣␣in␣the␣text
The \verb command can be used in a similar fashion with a star:
\verb*|like
this :-) |
like␣␣␣this␣:-)␣
The verbatim environment and the \verb command may not be used
within parameters of other commands.
2.11.6
Tabular
The tabular environment can be used to typeset beautiful tables with
optional horizontal and vertical lines. LATEX determines the width of the
columns automatically.
The table spec argument of the
\begin{tabular}[pos]{table spec}
command defines the format of the table. Use an l for a column of leftaligned text, r for right-aligned text, and c for centred text; p{width }
46
Typesetting Text
for a column containing justified text with line breaks, and | for a vertical
line.
If the text in a column is too wide for the page, LATEX won’t automatically
wrap it. Using p{width } you can define a special type of column which
will wrap-around the text as in a normal paragraph.
The pos argument specifies the vertical position of the table relative to
the baseline of the surrounding text. Use one of the letters t , b and c to
specify table alignment at the top, bottom or centre.
Within a tabular environment, & jumps to the next column, \\ starts
a new line and \hline inserts a horizontal line. Add partial lines by using
\cline{i-j}, where i and j are the column numbers the line should extend
over.
\begin{tabular}{|r|l|}
\hline
3700 & octal \\ \cline{2-2}
11111000000 & binary \\
\hline \hline
1984 & decimal \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
7C0
3700
11111000000
1984
\begin{tabular}{|p{4.7cm}|}
\hline
Welcome to Boxy’s paragraph.
We sincerely hope you’ll
all enjoy the show.\\
\hline
\end{tabular}
Welcome to Boxy’s paragraph.
We sincerely hope you’ll all enjoy the show.
octal
binary
decimal
The column separator can be specified with the @{...} construct. This
command kills the inter-column space and replaces it with whatever is
between the curly braces. One common use for this command is explained
below in the decimal alignment problem. Another possible application is to
suppress leading space in a table with @{} .
\begin{tabular}{@{} l @{}}
\hline
\hline
\end{tabular}
2.11 Environments
\begin{tabular}{l}
\hline
\hline
\end{tabular}
47
Since there is no built-in way to align numeric columns to a decimal
point,23 we can “cheat” and do it by using two columns: a right-aligned integer
and a left-aligned fraction. The @{.} command in the \begin{tabular}
line replaces the normal inter-column spacing with just a “.”, giving the
appearance of a single, decimal-point-justified column. Don’t forget to
replace the decimal point in your numbers with a column separator (&)!
A column label can be placed above our numeric “column” by using the
\multicolumn command.
\begin{tabular}{c r @{.} l}
Pi expression
&
\multicolumn{2}{c}{Value} \\
\hline
$\pi$
& 3&1416 \\
$\pi^{\pi}$
& 36&46
\\
$(\pi^{\pi})^{\pi}$ & 80662&7 \\
\end{tabular}
Pi expression
π
ππ
(π π )π
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|}
\hline
\multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Ene} \\
\hline
Mene & Muh! \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
Ene
Mene Muh!
Value
3.1416
36.46
80662.7
Material typeset with the tabular environment always stays together on
one page. If you want to typeset long tables, you might want to use the
longtable environments.
Sometimes the default LATEX tables do feel a bit cramped. So you
may want to give them a bit more breathing space by setting a higher
\arraystretch and \tabcolsep value.
23
If the ‘tools’ bundle is installed on your system, have a look at the dcolumn package.
48
Typesetting Text
\begin{tabular}{|l|}
\hline
These lines\\\hline
are tight\\\hline
\end{tabular}
{\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
\renewcommand{\tabcolsep}{0.2cm}
\begin{tabular}{|l|}
\hline
less cramped\\\hline
table layout\\\hline
\end{tabular}}
These lines
are tight
less cramped
table layout
If you just want to grow the height of a single row in your table add an
invisible vertical bar24 . Use a zero width \rule to implement this trick.
\begin{tabular}{|c|}
\hline
\rule{1pt}{4ex}Pitprop \ldots\\
\hline
\rule{0pt}{4ex}Strut\\
\hline
\end{tabular}
Pitprop . . .
Strut
The pt and ex in the example above are TEX units. Read more on units
in table 6.5 on page 130.
A number of extra commands, enhancing the tabular environment are
available in the booktabs package. It makes the creation of professional
looking tables with proper spacing quite a bit simpler.
2.12
Floating Bodies
Today most publications contain a lot of figures and tables. These elements
need special treatment, because they cannot be broken across pages. One
method would be to start a new page every time a figure or a table is too
large to fit on the present page. This approach would leave pages partially
The solution to this problem is to ‘float’ any figure or table that does not
fit on the current page to a later page, while filling the current page with
body text. LATEX offers two environments for floating bodies; one for tables
and one for figures. To take full advantage of these two environments it is
important to understand approximately how LATEX handles floats internally.
Otherwise floats may become a major source of frustration, because LATEX
never puts them where you want them to be.
24
In professional typesetting, this is called a strut.
2.12 Floating Bodies
Let’s first have a look at the commands LATEX supplies for floats:
Any material enclosed in a figure or table environment will be treated
as floating matter. Both float environments support an optional parameter
\begin{figure}[placement specifier] or \begin{table}[. . . ]
called the placement specifier. This parameter is used to tell LATEX about the
locations to which the float is allowed to be moved. A placement specifier is
constructed by building a string of float-placing permissions. See Table 2.9.
For example, a table could be started with the following line
\begin{table}[!hbp]
The placement specifier [!hbp] allows LATEX to place the table right here
(h) or at the bottom (b) of some page or on a special floats page (p), and all
this even if it does not look that good (!). If no placement specifier is given,
the standard classes assume [tbp].
LATEX will place every float it encounters according to the placement
specifier supplied by the author. If a float cannot be placed on the current
page it is deferred either to the figures queue or the tables queue.25 When
a new page is started, LATEX first checks if it is possible to fill a special
‘float’ page with floats from the queues. If this is not possible, the first float
on each queue is treated as if it had just occurred in the text: LATEX tries
again to place it according to its respective placement specifiers (except ‘h,’
which is no longer possible). Any new floats occurring in the text get placed
into the appropriate queues. LATEX strictly maintains the original order of
appearance for each type of float. That’s why a figure that cannot be placed
pushes all further figures to the end of the document. Therefore:
25
These are FIFO—‘first in first out’—queues!
Table 2.9: Float Placing Permissions.
Spec
h
t
b
p
!
a
Permission to place the float . . .
here at the very place in the text where it occurred. This is useful mainly for small floats.
at the top of a page
at the bottom of a page
on a special page containing only floats.
without considering most of the internal parametersa , which could otherwise stop this float from
being placed.
Such as the maximum number of floats allowed on one page.
49
50
Typesetting Text
If LATEX is not placing the floats as you expected, it is often only
one float jamming one of the two float queues.
While it is possible to give LATEX single-location placement specifiers,
this causes problems. If the float does not fit in the location specified it
becomes stuck, blocking subsequent floats. In particular, you should never,
is automatically replaced by [ht].
Having explained the difficult bit, there are some more things to mention
about the table and figure environments. Use the
\caption{caption text}
command to define a caption for the float. A running number and the string
“Figure” or “Table” will be added by LATEX.
The two commands
\listoffigures and \listoftables
operate analogously to the \tableofcontents command, printing a list of
figures or tables, respectively. These lists will display the whole caption, so if
you tend to use long captions you must have a shorter version of the caption
for the lists. This is accomplished by entering the short version in brackets
after the \caption command.
\caption[Short]{LLLLLoooooonnnnnggggg}
Use \label and \ref to create a reference to a float within your text.
Note that the \label command must come after the \caption command
since you want it to reference the number of the caption.
The following example draws a square and inserts it into the document.
You could use this if you wanted to reserve space for images you are going
to paste into the finished document.
Figure~\ref{white} is an example of Pop-Art.
\begin{figure}[!hbtp]
\makebox[\textwidth]{\framebox[5cm]{\rule{0pt}{5cm}}}
\caption{Five by Five in Centimetres.\label{white}}
\end{figure}
In the example above, LATEX will try really hard (!) to place the figure right
here (h).26 If this is not possible, it tries to place the figure at the bottom (b)
of the page. Failing to place the figure on the current page, it determines
26
assuming the figure queue is empty.
2.13 Protecting Fragile Commands
whether it is possible to create a float page containing this figure and maybe
some tables from the tables queue. If there is not enough material for a
special float page, LATEX starts a new page, and once more treats the figure
as if it had just occurred in the text.
Under certain circumstances it might be necessary to use the
\clearpage or even the \cleardoublepage
command. It orders LATEX to immediately place all floats remaining in the
queues and then start a new page. \cleardoublepage even goes to a new
right-hand page.
You will learn how to include PostScript drawings in your LATEX 2ε
documents later in this introduction.
2.13
Protecting Fragile Commands
Text given as arguments of commands like \caption or \section may show
in the body of the document). Some commands will break when used in the
argument of \section-like commands. Compilation of your document will
fail. These commands are called fragile commands—for example, \footnote
or \phantom. These fragile commands need protection (don’t we all?).
Protect them by putting the \protect command in front of them. Now they
will work properly even when used in moving arguments.
\protect only affects the next command, not even to its arguments. In
most cases a superfluous \protect won’t hurt.
\section{I am considerate
\protect\footnote{and protect my footnotes}}
51
Chapter 3
Typesetting Mathematical
Formulae
Now you are ready! In this chapter, we will attack the main strength of TEX:
mathematical typesetting. But be warned, this chapter only scratches the surface.
While the things explained here are sufficient for many people, don’t despair
if you can’t find a solution to your mathematical typesetting needs here. It is
3.1
The AMS-LATEX bundle
If you want to typeset (advanced) mathematics, you should use AMS-LATEX.
The AMS-LATEX bundle is a collection of packages and classes for mathematical typesetting. We will mostly deal with the amsmath package which is a
part of the bundle. AMS-LATEX is produced by The American Mathematical
Society and it is used extensively for mathematical typesetting. LATEX itself
does provide some basic features and environments for mathematics, but they
are limited (or maybe it’s the other way around: AMS-LATEX is unlimited!)
and in some cases inconsistent.
AMS-LATEX is a part of the required distribution and is provided with all
recent LATEX distributions.1 In this chapter, we assume amsmath is loaded
in the preamble; \usepackage{amsmath}.
3.2
Single Equations
A mathematical formula can be typeset in-line within a paragraph (text style),
or the paragraph can be broken and the formula typeset separately (display
style). Mathematical equations within a paragraph are entered between $and$:
1
If yours is missing it, go to CTAN://pkg/amslatex.
54
Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
Add $a$ squared and $b$ squared
to get $c$ squared. Or, using
a more mathematical approach:
$a^2 + b^2 = c^2$
Add a squared and b squared to get c
squared. Or, using a more mathematical
approach: a2 + b2 = c2
\TeX{} is pronounced as
$\tau\epsilon\chi$\$5pt] 100~m^{3} of water\\[5pt] This comes from my \heartsuit TEX is pronounced as τ χ 100 m3 of water This comes from my ♥ If you want your larger equations to be set apart from the rest of the paragraph, it is preferable to display them rather than to break the paragraph apart. To do this, you enclose them between $$and$$.2 You can then \label an equation number and refer to it somewhere else in the text by using the \eqref command. If you want to name the equation something specific, you \tag it instead. Add a squared and b squared to get c squared. Or, using a more mathematical approach $$a^2 + b^2 = c^2$$ Einstein says $$E = mc^2 \label{clever}$$ He didn’t say $$1 + 1 = 3 \tag{dumb}$$ This is a reference to \eqref{clever}. Add a squared and b squared to get c squared. Or, using a more mathematical approach a2 + b2 = c2 (3.1) Einstein says E = mc2 (3.2) 1+1=3 (dumb) He didn’t say This is a reference to (3.2). If you don’t want LATEX to number the equations, use the starred version of equation using an asterisk, equation*, or even easier, enclose the equation in \[ and$:3
2
This is an amsmath command. If you don’t have access to the package for some obscure
reason, you can use LATEX’s own displaymath environment instead.
3
This is again from amsmath. Standard LATEX’s has only the equation environment
without the star.
3.2 Single Equations
Add $a$ squared and $b$ squared
to get $c$ squared. Or, using
a more mathematical approach
\begin{equation*}$$a^2 + b^2 = c^2$$\end{equation*}
or you can type less for the
same effect:
$a^2 + b^2 = c^2$
55
Add a squared and b squared to get c
squared. Or, using a more mathematical
approach
a2 + b2 = c2
or you can type less for the same effect:
a2 + b2 = c2
While is short and sweet, it does not allow switching between numbered and not numbered style as easily as equation and equation*. Note the difference in typesetting style between text style and display style equations: This is text style: \lim_{n \to \infty} \sum_{k=1}^n \frac{1}{k^2} = \frac{\pi^2}{6}. And this is display style: $$\lim_{n \to \infty} \sum_{k=1}^n \frac{1}{k^2} = \frac{\pi^2}{6}$$ This is text style: limn→∞ And this is display style: Pn n X π2 1 = n→∞ k2 6 lim 1 k=1 k2 = π2 6 . (3.3) k=1 In text style, enclose tall or deep math expressions or sub expressions in \smash. This makes LATEX ignore the height of these expressions. This keeps the line spacing even. A d_{e_{e_p}} mathematical expression followed by a h^{i^{g^h}} expression. As opposed to a smashed \smash{d_{e_{e_p}}} expression followed by a \smash{h^{i^{g^h}}} expression. 3.2.1 A deep mathematical expression followed gh by a hi expression. As opposed to ha g smashed deep expression followed by a hi expression. Math Mode There are also differences between math mode and text mode. For example, in math mode: 1. Most spaces and line breaks do not have any significance, as all spaces are either derived logically from the mathematical expressions, or have to be specified with special commands such as \,, \quad or \qquad (we’ll get back to that later, see section 3.7). 56 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae 2. Empty lines are not allowed. Only one paragraph per formula. 3. Each letter is considered to be the name of a variable and will be typeset as such. If you want to typeset normal text within a formula (normal upright font and normal spacing) then you have to enter the text using the \text{...} command (see also section 3.8 on page 70). \forall x \in \mathbf{R}: \qquad x^{2} \geq 0 ∀x ∈ R : x^{2} \geq 0\qquad \text{for all }x\in\mathbf{R} x2 ≥ 0 x2 ≥ 0 for all x ∈ R Mathematicians can be very fussy about which symbols are used: it would be conventional here to use the ‘blackboard bold’ font, which is obtained using \mathbb from the package amssymb.4 The last example becomes x^{2} \geq 0\qquad \text{for all } x \in \mathbb{R} x2 ≥ 0 for all x ∈ R See Table 3.14 on page 79 and Table 6.4 on page 125 for more math fonts. 3.3 Building Blocks of a Mathematical Formula In this section, we describe the most important commands used in mathematical typesetting. Most of the commands in this section will not require amsmath (if they do, it will be stated clearly), but load it anyway. Lowercase Greek letters are entered as \alpha, \beta, \gamma, . . . , uppercase letters are entered as \Gamma, \Delta, . . . 5 Take a look at Table 3.2 on page 75 for a list of Greek letters. \lambda,\xi,\pi,\theta, \mu,\Phi,\Omega,\Delta λ, ξ, π, θ, µ, Φ, Ω, ∆ Exponents, Superscripts and Subscripts can be specified using the ^ and the _ characters. Most math mode commands act only on the next character, so if you want a command to affect several characters, you have to group them together using curly braces: {...}. 4 amssymb is not a part of the AMS-LATEX bundle, but it is perhaps still a part of your LATEX distribution. Check your distribution or go to CTAN:/fonts/amsfonts/latex/ to obtain it. 5 There is no uppercase Alpha, Beta etc. defined in LATEX 2ε because it looks the same as a normal roman A, B. . . 3.3 Building Blocks of a Mathematical Formula 57 Table 3.3 on page 76 lists a lot of binary relations like ⊆ and ⊥. p^3_{ij} \qquad m_\text{Knuth}\qquad \sum_{k=1}^3 k \\[5pt] a^x+y \neq a^{x+y}\qquad e^{x^2} \neq {e^x}^2 p3ij P3 mKnuth k=1 k 2 ex 6= ex 2 ax + y 6= ax+y The square root is entered as \sqrt; the nth root is generated with \sqrt[n]. The size of the root sign is determined automatically by LATEX. If just the sign is needed, use \surd. See various kinds of arrows like ,→ and on Table 3.6 on page 77. \sqrt{x} \Leftrightarrow x^{1/2} \quad \sqrt[3]{2} \quad \sqrt{x^{2} + \sqrt{y}} \quad \surd[x^2 + y^2] √ x ⇔ x1/2 √ 3 2 p x2 + √ y √ [x2 + y 2 ] While the dot sign to indicate the multiplication operation is normally left out, it is sometimes written to help the eye in grouping a formula. Use \cdot to typeset a single centered dot. \cdots is three centered dots while \ldots sets the dots low (on the baseline). Besides that, there are \vdots for vertical and \ddots for diagonal dots. There are more examples in section 3.6. \Psi = v_1 \cdot v_2 \cdot \ldots \qquad n! = 1 \cdot 2 \cdots (n-1) \cdot n Ψ = v1 · v2 · . . . n! = 1 · 2 · · · (n − 1) · n The commands \overline and \underline create horizontal lines directly over or under an expression: 0.\overline{3} = \underline{\underline{1/3}} 0.3 = 1/3 The commands \overbrace and \underbrace create long horizontal braces over or under an expression: \underbrace{\overbrace{a+b+c}^6 \cdot \overbrace{d+e+f}^7} _\text{meaning of life} = 42 6 7 z }| { z }| { a + b + c · d + e + f = 42 | {z } meaning of life To add mathematical accents such as small arrows or tilde signs to variables, the commands given in Table 3.1 on page 75 might be useful. Wide 58 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae hats and tildes covering several characters are generated with \widetilde and \widehat. Notice the difference between \hat and \widehat and the placement of \bar for a variable with subscript. The apostrophe mark ’ gives a prime: f(x) = x^2 \qquad f’(x) = 2x \qquad f’’(x) = 2\\[5pt] \hat{XY} \quad \widehat{XY} \quad \bar{x_0} \quad \bar{x}_0 f (x) = x2 ˆ XY d XY f 0 (x) = 2x x¯0 f 00 (x) = 2 x̄0 Vectors are often specified by adding small arrow symbols on the tops of variables. This is done with the \vec command. The two commands \overrightarrow and \overleftarrow are useful to denote the vector from A to B: \vec{a} \qquad \vec{AB} \qquad \overrightarrow{AB} ~a ~ AB −−→ AB Names of functions are often typeset in an upright font, and not in italics as variables are, so LATEX supplies the following commands to typeset the most common function names: \arccos \cos \csc \exp \ker \limsup \arcsin \cosh \deg \gcd \lg \ln \arctan \cot \det \hom \lim \log \arg \coth \dim \inf \liminf \max \sinh \sup \tan \tanh \min \Pr \sec \sin \begin{equation*} \lim_{x \rightarrow 0} \frac{\sin x}{x}=1 \end{equation*} lim x→0 sin x =1 x For functions missing from the list, use the \DeclareMathOperator command. There is even a starred version for functions with limits. This command works only in the preamble so the commented lines in the example below must be put into the preamble. %\DeclareMathOperator{\argh}{argh} %\DeclareMathOperator*{\nut}{Nut} \begin{equation*} 3\argh = 2\nut_{x=1} \end{equation*} 3 argh = 2 Nut x=1 For the modulo function, there are two commands: \bmod for the binary operator “a mod b” and \pmod for expressions such as “x ≡ a (mod b):” 3.3 Building Blocks of a Mathematical Formula a\bmod b \\ x\equiv a \pmod{b} 59 a mod b x ≡ a (mod b) A built-up fraction is typeset with the \frac{...}{...} command. In in-line equations, the fraction is shrunk to fit the line. This style is obtainable in display style with \tfrac. The reverse, i.e. display style fraction in text, is made with \dfrac. Often the slashed form 1/2 is preferable, because it looks better for small amounts of ‘fraction material:’ In display style: \begin{equation*} 3/8 \qquad \frac{3}{8} \qquad \tfrac{3}{8} \end{equation*} In text style: 1\frac{1}{2}~hours \qquad 1\dfrac{1}{2}~hours In display style: 3/8 3 8 3 8 In text style: 1 21 hours 1 1 hours 2 Here the \partial command for partial derivatives is used: \begin{equation*} \sqrt{\frac{x^2}{k+1}}\qquad x^\frac{2}{k+1}\qquad \frac{\partial^2f} {\partial x^2} \end{equation*} r x2 k+1 2 x k+1 ∂2f ∂x2 To typeset binomial coefficients or similar structures, use the command \binom from amsmath: Pascal’s rule is \begin{equation*} \binom{n}{k} =\binom{n-1}{k} + \binom{n-1}{k-1} \end{equation*} Pascal’s rule is n n−1 n−1 = + k k k−1 For binary relations it may be useful to stack symbols over each other. \stackrel{#1}{#2} puts the symbol given in #1 in superscript-like size over #2 which is set in its usual position. \begin{equation*} f_n(x) \stackrel{*}{\approx} 1 \end{equation*} ∗ fn (x) ≈ 1 60 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae The integral operator is generated with \int, the sum operator with \sum, and the product operator with \prod. The upper and lower limits are specified with ^ and _ like superscripts and subscripts: \begin{equation*} \sum_{i=1}^n \qquad \int_0^{\frac{\pi}{2}} \qquad \prod_\epsilon \end{equation*} Z n X π 2 0 i=1 Y To get more control over the placement of indices in complex expressions, amsmath provides the \substack command: \begin{equation*} \sum^n_{\substack{0<i<n \\ j\subseteq i}} P(i,j) = Q(i,j) \end{equation*} n X P (i, j) = Q(i, j) 0<i<n j⊆i LATEX provides all sorts of symbols for bracketing and other delimiters (e.g. [ h k l). Round and square brackets can be entered with the corresponding keys and curly braces with \{, but all other delimiters are generated with special commands (e.g. \updownarrow). \begin{equation*} {a,b,c} \neq \{a,b,c\} \end{equation*} a, b, c 6= {a, b, c} If you put \left in front of an opening delimiter and \right in front of a closing delimiter, LATEX will automatically determine the correct size of the delimiter. Note that you must close every \left with a corresponding \right. If you don’t want anything on the right, use the invisible “\right.”: \begin{equation*} 1 + \left(\frac{1}{1-x^{2}} \right)^3 \qquad \left. \ddagger \frac{~}{~}\right) \end{equation*} 1+ 1 1 − x2 3 ‡ In some cases it is necessary to specify the correct size of a mathematical delimiter by hand, which can be done using the commands \big, \Big, \bigg and \Bigg as prefixes to most delimiter commands: \Big((x+1)(x-1)\Big)^{2}\\ \big( \Big( \bigg( \Bigg( \quad \big\} \Big\} \bigg\} \Bigg\} \quad \big\| \Big\| \bigg\| \Bigg\| \quad \big\Downarrow \Big\Downarrow \bigg\Downarrow \Bigg\Downarrow 2 (x + 1)(x − 1) ) o ww ww ww w ww w  3.4 Single Equations that are Too Long: multline 61 For a list of all delimiters available, see Table 3.8 on page 78. 3.4 Single Equations that are Too Long: multline If an equation is too long, we have to wrap it somehow. Unfortunately, wrapped equations are usually less easy to read than not wrapped ones. To improve the readability, there are certain rules on how to do the wrapping: 1. In general one should always wrap an equation before an equality sign or an operator. 2. A wrap before an equality sign is preferable to a wrap before any operator. 3. A wrap before a plus- or minus-operator is preferable to a wrap before a multiplication-operator. 4. Any other type of wrap should be avoided if at all possible. The easiest way to achieve such a wrapping is the use of the multline environment:6 \begin{multline} a + b + c + d + e + f + g + h + i \\ = j + k + l + m + n \end{multline} a+b+c+d+e+f +g+h+i =j+k+l+m+n (3.4) The difference from the equation environment is that an arbitrary line-break (or also multiple line-breaks) can be introduced. This is done by putting a \\ on those places where the equation needs to be wrapped. Similarly to equation* there also exists a multline* version for preventing an equation number. Often the IEEEeqnarray environment (see section 3.5) will yield better results. Consider the following situation: $$a = b + c + d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p \label{eq:equation_too_long}$$ a = b+c+d+e+f +g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p (3.5) Here it is actually the RHS that is too long to fit on one line. The multline environment creates the following output: 6 The multline-environment is from amsmath. 62 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae \begin{multline} a = b + c + d + e + f + g + h + i + j \\ + k + l + m + n + o + p \end{multline} a=b+c+d+e+f +g+h+i+j +k+l+m+n+o+p (3.6) This is better than (3.5), but it has the disadvantage that the equality sign loses its natural greater importance with respect to the plus operator in front of k. The better solution is provided by the IEEEeqnarray environment that will be discussed in detail in Section 3.5. 3.5 Multiple Equations In the most general situation we have a sequence of several equalities that do not fit onto one line. Here we need to work with vertical alignment in order to keep the array of equations in a nice and readable structure. Before we offer our suggestions on how to do this, we start with a few bad examples that show the biggest drawbacks of some common solutions. 3.5.1 Problems with Traditional Commands To group multiple equations the align environment7 could be used: \begin{align} a & = b + c \\ & = d + e \end{align} a=b+c (3.7) =d+e (3.8) this approach fails once a single line is too long: \begin{align} a & = b + c & = d + e + + j + k + l & + m + n + & = p + q + \end{align} \\ f + g + h + i \nonumber \\ o \\ r + s a=b+c (3.9) =d+e+f +g+h+i+j+k+l +m+n+o (3.10) =p+q+r+s (3.11) Here + m should be below d and not below the equality sign. A TEXpert will point out that \mathrel{\phantom{=}} \negmedspace {}, would add the necessary space in front of +m+n+o, but since most users lack that kind of imagination, a simpler solution would be nice. 7 The align-environment can also be used to group several blocks of equations beside each other. Another excellent use case for the IEEEeqnarray environment. Try an argument like {rCl+rCl}. 3.5 Multiple Equations 63 This is the moment where the eqnarray environment bursts onto the scene: \begin{eqnarray} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k + l \nonumber \\ && +\: m + n + o \\ & = & p + q + r + s \end{eqnarray} a = b+c (3.12) = d+e+f +g+h+i+j+k+l +m+n+o (3.13) = p+q+r+s (3.14) It better but still not optimal. The spaces around the equality signs are too big. Particularly, they are not the same as in the multline$$and$$equation environments: \begin{eqnarray} a & = & a = a \end{eqnarray} a = a=a (3.15) . . . and the expression sometimes overlaps with the equation number even though there would be enough room on the left: \begin{eqnarray} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h^2 + i^2 + j \label{eq:faultyeqnarray} \end{eqnarray} a = b+c (3.16) 2 2 = d + e + f + g + h + i +(3.17) j While the environment offers a command \lefteqn that can be used when the LHS is too long: \begin{eqnarray} \lefteqn{a + b + c + d + e + f + g + h}\nonumber\\ & = & i + j + k + l + m \\ & = & n + o + p + q + r + s \end{eqnarray} a+b+c+d+e+f +g+h = i+j+k+l+m (3.18) = n + o + p + q + r + s (3.19) This is not optimal either as the RHS is too short and the array is not properly centered: 64 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae \begin{eqnarray} \lefteqn{a + b + c + d + e + f + g + h} \nonumber \\ & = & i + j \end{eqnarray} a+b+c+d+e+f +g+h = i+j (3.20) Having badmouthed the competition sufficiently, I can now steer you gently towards the glorious . . . 3.5.2 IEEEeqnarray Environment The IEEEeqnarray environment is a very powerful command with many options. Here, we will only introduce its basic functionalities. For more information please refer to the manual.8 First of all, in order to be able to use the IEEEeqnarray environment one needs to load the package9 IEEEtrantools. Include the following line in the header of your document: \usepackage[retainorgcmds]{IEEEtrantools} The strength of IEEEeqnarray is the ability to specify the number of columns in the equation array. Usually, this specification will be {rCl}, i.e., three columns, the first column right-justified, the middle one centered with a little more space around it (therefore we specify capital C instead of lower-case c) and the third column left-justified: \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k \nonumber\\ && \negmedspace {} + l + m + n + o \\ & = & p + q + r + s \end{IEEEeqnarray} a=b+c (3.21) =d+e+f +g+h+i+j+k +l+m+n+o =p+q+r+s (3.22) (3.23) Any number of columns can be specified: {c} will give only one column with all entries centered, or {rCll} would add a fourth, left-justified column to use for comments. Moreover, beside l, c, r, L, C, R for math mode entries there are also s, t, u for left, centered, and right text mode entries. Additional space can be added with . and / and ? in increasing order.10 Note the spaces around the equality signs in contrast to the space produced by the eqnarray environment. 8 The official manual is called CTAN://macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/IEEEtran_ HOWTO.pdf. The part about IEEEeqnarray can be found in Appendix F. 9 The IEEEtrantools package may not be included in your setup, it can be found on CTAN. 10 For more spacing types refer to Section 3.9.1. 3.5 Multiple Equations 3.5.3 65 Common Usage In the following we will describe how we use IEEEeqnarray to solve the most common problems. If a line overlaps with the equation number as in (3.17), the command \IEEEeqnarraynumspace can be used: it has to be added in the corresponding line and makes sure that the whole equation array is shifted by the size of the equation numbers (the shift depends on the size of the number!): instead of \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k \\ & = & l + m + n \end{IEEEeqnarray} a=b+c (3.24) = d + e + f + g + h + i + j + (3.25) k =l+m+n (3.26) we get \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k \IEEEeqnarraynumspace\\ & = & l + m + n. \end{IEEEeqnarray} a=b+c (3.27) = d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k (3.28) = l + m + n. (3.29) If the LHS is too long, as a replacement for the faulty \lefteqn command, IEEEeqnarray offers the \IEEEeqnarraymulticol command which works in all situations: \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{3}{l}{ a + b + c + d + e + f + g + h }\nonumber\\ \quad & = & i + j \\ & = & k + l + m \end{IEEEeqnarray} a+b+c+d+e+f +g+h =i+j (3.30) =k+l+m (3.31) The usage is identical to the \multicolumns command in the tabularenvironment. The first argument {3} specifies that three columns shall be combined into one which will be left-justified {l}. 66 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae Note that by inserting \quad commands one can easily adapt the depth of the equation signs,11 e.g., \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{3}{l}{ a + b + c + d + e + f + g + h }\nonumber\\ \qquad\qquad & = & i + j \\ & = & k + l + m \end{IEEEeqnarray} a+b+c+d+e+f +g+h =i+j (3.32) =k+l+m (3.33) If an equation is split into two or more lines, LATEX interprets the first + or − as a sign instead of operator. Therefore, it is necessary to add an empty group {} before the operator: instead of \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k \nonumber\\ && + l + m + n + o \\ & = & p + q + r + s \end{IEEEeqnarray} a=b+c (3.34) =d+e+f +g+h+i+j+k +l + m + n + o =p+q+r+s (3.35) (3.36) we should write \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k \nonumber\\ && \negmedspace {} + l + m + n + o \\ & = & p + q + r + s \end{IEEEeqnarray} a=b+c (3.37) =d+e+f +g+h+i+j+k +l+m+n+o =p+q+r+s (3.38) (3.39) Note the space difference between + and l! The construction {} + l forces the +-sign to be an operator rather than just a sign, and the unwanted ensuing space between {} and + is compensated by a negative medium space \negmedspace. If a particular line should not have an equation number, the number can be suppressed using \nonumber (or \IEEEnonumber). If on such a line a label \label{eq:...} is defined, then this label is passed on to the next 11 I think that one quad is the distance that looks good for most cases. 3.6 Arrays and Matrices 67 equation number that is not suppressed. Place the labels right before the line-break \\ or the next to the equation it belongs to. Apart from improving the readability of the source code this prevents a compilation error when a \IEEEmulticol command follows the label-definition. There also exists a *-version where all equation numbers are suppressed. In this case an equation number can be made to appear using the command \IEEEyesnumber: \begin{IEEEeqnarray*}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e \IEEEyesnumber\\ & = & f + g \end{IEEEeqnarray*} a=b+c =d+e (3.40) =f +g Sub-numbers are also easily possible using \IEEEyessubnumber: \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \IEEEyessubnumber\\ & = & d + e \nonumber\\ & = & f + g \IEEEyessubnumber \end{IEEEeqnarray} 3.6 a=b+c (3.40a) =d+e =f +g (3.40b) Arrays and Matrices To typeset arrays, use the array environment. It works in a similar way to the tabular environment. The \\ command is used to break the lines: \begin{equation*} \mathbf{X} = \left( \begin{array}{ccc} x_1 & x_2 & \ldots \\ x_3 & x_4 & \ldots \\ \vdots & \vdots & \ddots \end{array} \right) \end{equation*}  x1  x3 X= .. . x2 x4 .. .  ... ...   .. . The array environment can also be used to typeset piecewise functions by using a “.” as an invisible \right delimiter: 68 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae \begin{equation*} |x| = \left\{ \begin{array}{rl} -x & \text{if } x < 0,\\ 0 & \text{if } x = 0,\\ x & \text{if } x > 0. \end{array} \right. \end{equation*}   −x 0 |x| =  x if x < 0, if x = 0, if x > 0. The cases environment from amsmath simplifies the syntax, so it is worth a look: \begin{equation*} |x| = \begin{cases} -x & \text{if } x < 0,\\ 0 & \text{if } x = 0,\\ x & \text{if } x > 0. \end{cases} \end{equation*}   −x if x < 0, |x| = 0 if x = 0,   x if x > 0. Matrices can be typeset by array, but amsmath provides a better solution using the different matrix environments. There are six versions with different delimiters: matrix (none), pmatrix (, bmatrix [, Bmatrix {, vmatrix |$$and$$Vmatrix k. You don’t have to specify the number of columns as with array. The maximum number is 10, but it is customisable (though it is not very often you need 10 columns!): \begin{equation*} \begin{matrix} 1 & 2 \\ 3 & 4 \end{matrix} \qquad \begin{bmatrix} p_{11} & p_{12} & & p_{1n} \\ p_{21} & p_{22} & & p_{2n} \\ \vdots & \vdots & & \vdots \\ p_{m1} & p_{m2} & & p_{mn} \end{bmatrix} \end{equation*} \ldots \ldots \ddots \ldots 1 3 2 4  p11  p21   ..  . pm1 p12 p22 .. . ... ... .. . pm2 ...  p1n p2n   ..  .  pmn 3.7 Spacing in Math Mode 3.7 69 Spacing in Math Mode If the spacing within formulae chosen by LATEX is not satisfactory, it can be 3 quad ( ), \: for adjusted by inserting special spacing commands: \, for 18 4 5 18 quad ( ) and \; for 18 quad ( ). The escaped space character \␣ generates a medium sized space comparable to the interword spacing and \quad ( ) and \qquad ( ) produce large spaces. The size of a \quad corresponds to the width of the character ‘M’ of the current font. \! produces a negative 3 space of − 18 quad (− ). \begin{equation*} \int_1^2 \ln x \mathrm{d}x \qquad \int_1^2 \ln x \,\mathrm{d}x \end{equation*} Z 1 2 ln xdx Z 2 1 ln x dx Note that ‘d’ in the differential is conventionally set in roman. In the next example, we define a new command \ud (upright d) which produces “ d” (notice the spacing before the d), so we don’t have to write it every time. The \newcommand is placed in the preamble. \newcommand{\ud}{\,\mathrm{d}} Z \begin{equation*} \int_a^b f(x)\ud x \end{equation*} b f (x) dx a If you want to typeset multiple integrals, you’ll discover that the spacing between the integrals is too wide. You can correct it using \!, but amsmath provides an easier way for fine-tuning the spacing, namely the \iint, \iiint, \iiiint, and \idotsint commands. \newcommand{\ud}{\,\mathrm{d}} \begin{IEEEeqnarray*}{c} \int\int f(x)g(y) \ud x \ud y \\ \int\!\!\!\int f(x)g(y) \ud x \ud y \\ \iint f(x)g(y) \ud x \ud y \end{IEEEeqnarray*} Z Z ZZ ZZ f (x)g(y) dx dy f (x)g(y) dx dy f (x)g(y) dx dy See the electronic document testmath.tex (distributed with AMS-LATEX) or Chapter 8 of The LATEX Companion [3] for further details. 70 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae 3.7.1 Phantoms When vertically aligning text using ^ and _ LATEX is sometimes just a little too helpful. Using the \phantom command you can reserve space for characters that do not show up in the final output. The easiest way to understand this is to look at an example: \begin{equation*} {}^{14}_{6}\text{C} \qquad \text{versus} \qquad {}^{14}_{\phantom{1}6}\text{C} \end{equation*} 14 6 C versus 14 6C If you want to typeset a lot of isotopes as in the example, the mhchem package is very useful for typesetting isotopes and chemical formulae too. 3.8 Fiddling with the Math Fonts Different math fonts are listed on Table 3.14 on page 79. \Re \qquad \mathcal{R} \qquad \mathfrak{R} \qquad \mathbb{R} \qquad  < R R R The last two require amssymb or amsfonts. Sometimes you need to tell LATEX the correct font size. In math mode, this is set with the following four commands: \displaystyle (123), \textstyle (123), \scriptstyle (123)$$and$$\scriptscriptstyle (123). P If is placed in a fraction, it’ll be typeset in text style unless you tell A L TEX otherwise: \begin{equation*} P = \frac{\displaystyle{ \sum_{i=1}^n (x_i- x) (y_i- y)}} {\displaystyle{\left[ \sum_{i=1}^n(x_i-x)^2 \sum_{i=1}^n(y_i- y)^2 \right]^{1/2}}} \end{equation*} P =" n X i=1 n X (xi − x)(yi − y) i=1 (xi − x)2 n X i=1 (yi − y)2 #1/2 Changing styles generally affects the way big operators and limits are displayed. 3.9 Theorems, Lemmas, . . . 3.8.1 71 Bold Symbols It is quite difficult to get bold symbols in LATEX; this is probably intentional as amateur typesetters tend to overuse them. The font change command \mathbf gives bold letters, but these are roman (upright) whereas mathematical symbols are normally italic, and furthermore it doesn’t work on lower case Greek letters. There is a \boldmath command, but this can only be used outside math mode. It works for symbols too, though: \mu, M \qquad \mathbf{\mu}, \mathbf{M} \qquad \boldmath{\mu, M} µ, M µ, M µ, M The package amsbsy (included by amsmath) as well as the package bm from the tools bundle make this much easier as they include a \boldsymbol command: \mu, M \qquad \boldsymbol{\mu}, \boldsymbol{M} 3.9 µ, M µ, M Theorems, Lemmas, . . . When writing mathematical documents, you probably need a way to typeset “Lemmas”, “Definitions”, “Axioms” and similar structures. \newtheorem{name}[counter]{text}[section] The name argument is a short keyword used to identify the “theorem”. With the text argument you define the actual name of the “theorem”, which will be printed in the final document. The arguments in square brackets are optional. They are both used to specify the numbering used on the “theorem”. Use the counter argument to specify the name of a previously declared “theorem”. The new “theorem” will then be numbered in the same sequence. The section argument allows you to specify the sectional unit within which the “theorem” should get its numbers. After executing the \newtheorem command in the preamble of your document, you can use the following command within the document. \begin{name}[text] This is my interesting theorem \end{name} The amsthm package (part of AMS-LATEX) provides the \theoremstyle{style} command which lets you define what the theorem is all about by picking 72 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae from three predefined styles: definition (fat title, roman body), plain (fat title, italic body) or remark (italic title, roman body). This should be enough theory. The following examples should remove any remaining doubt, and make it clear that the \newtheorem environment is way too complex to understand. First define the theorems: \theoremstyle{definition} \newtheorem{law}{Law} \theoremstyle{plain} \newtheorem{jury}[law]{Jury} \theoremstyle{remark} \newtheorem*{marg}{Margaret} \begin{law} \label{law:box} Don’t hide in the witness box \end{law} \begin{jury}[The Twelve] It could be you! So beware$$and$$see law~\ref{law:box}.\end{jury} \begin{jury} You will disregard the last statement.\end{jury} \begin{marg}No, No, No\end{marg} \begin{marg}Denis!\end{marg} Law 1. Don’t hide in the witness box Jury 2 (The Twelve). It could be you! So beware and see law 1. Jury 3. You will disregard the last statement. Margaret. No, No, No Margaret. Denis! The “Jury” theorem uses the same counter as the “Law” theorem, so it gets a number that is in sequence with the other “Laws”. The argument in square brackets is used to specify a title or something similar for the theorem. \newtheorem{mur}{Murphy}[section] \begin{mur} If there are two or more ways to do something,$$and$$one of those ways can result in a catastrophe, then someone will do it.\end{mur} Murphy 3.9.1. If there are two or more ways to do something, and one of those ways can result in a catastrophe, then someone will do it. The “Murphy” theorem gets a number that is linked to the number of the current section. You could also use another unit, for example chapter or subsection. If you want to customize your theorems down to the last dot, the ntheorem package offers a plethora of options. 3.9.1 Proofs and End-of-Proof Symbol The amsthm package also provides the proof environment. 3.9 Theorems, Lemmas, . . . \begin{proof} Trivial, use \begin{equation*} E=mc^2. \end{equation*} \end{proof} 73 Proof. Trivial, use E = mc2 . With the command \qedhere you can move the ‘end of proof’ symbol around for situations where it would end up alone on a line. \begin{proof} Trivial, use \begin{equation*} E=mc^2. \qedhere \end{equation*} \end{proof} Proof. Trivial, use E = mc2 . Unfortunately, this correction does not work for IEEEeqnarray: \begin{proof} This is a proof that ends with an equation array: \begin{IEEEeqnarray*}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e. \qedhere \end{IEEEeqnarray*} \end{proof} Proof. This is a proof that ends with an equation array: a=b+c = d + e. The reason for this is the internal structure of IEEEeqnarray: it always puts two invisible columns at both sides of the array that only contain a stretchable space. By this IEEEeqnarray ensures that the equation array is horizontally centered. The \qedhere command should actually be put outside this stretchable space, but this does not happen as these columns are invisible to the user. There is a very simple remedy. Define the stretching explicitly! \begin{proof} This is a proof that ends with an equation array: \begin{IEEEeqnarray*}{+rCl+x*} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e. & \qedhere \end{IEEEeqnarray*} \end{proof} Proof. This is a proof that ends with an equation array: a=b+c = d + e. Note that the + in {+rCl+x*} denotes stretchable spaces, one on the left of the equations (which, if not specified, will be done automatically by IEEEeqnarray!) and one on the right of the equations. But now on the 74 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae right, after the stretching column, we add an empty column x. This column will only be needed on the last line if the \qedhere command is put there. Finally, we specify a *. This is a null-space that prevents IEEEeqnarray from adding another unwanted +-space! In the case of equation numbering, there is a similar problem. Comparing \begin{proof} This is a proof that ends with a numbered equation: $$a = b + c.$$ \end{proof} Proof. This is a proof that ends with a numbered equation:$$a = b + c.$$(3.41) with \begin{proof} This is a proof that ends with a numbered equation: $$a = b + c. \qedhere$$ \end{proof} Proof. This is a proof that ends with a numbered equation:$$a = b + c.$$(3.42) you notice that in the (correct) second version the 2 is much closer to the equation than in the first version. Similarly, the correct way of putting the QED-symbol at the end of an equation array is as follows: \begin{proof} This is a proof that ends with an equation array: \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{+rCl+x*} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e. \\ &&& \qedhere\nonumber \end{IEEEeqnarray} \end{proof} Proof. This is a proof that ends with an equation array: a=b+c = d + e. (3.43) (3.44) which contrasts with \begin{proof} This is a proof that ends with an equation array: \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e. \end{IEEEeqnarray} \end{proof} Proof. This is a proof that ends with an equation array: a=b+c = d + e. (3.45) (3.46) 3.10 List of Mathematical Symbols 3.10 75 List of Mathematical Symbols The following tables demonstrate all the symbols normally accessible from math mode. Note that some tables show symbols only accessible after loading the amssymb package in the preamble of your document12 . If the AMS package and fonts are not installed on your system, have a look at CTAN: pkg/amslatex. An even more comprehensive list of symbols can be found at CTAN:info/symbols/comprehensive. Table 3.1: Math Mode Accents. â à ā á å \hat{a} \grave{a} \bar{a} \acute{a} \mathring{a} ǎ ȧ ~a ă \check{a} \dot{a} \vec{a} \breve{a} ã ä [ AAA ] AAA \tilde{a} \ddot{a} \widehat{AAA} \widetilde{AAA} Table 3.2: Greek Letters. There is no uppercase of some of the letters like \Alpha, \Beta and so on, because they look the same as normal roman letters: A, B. . . α β γ δ ε ζ η Γ ∆ Θ 12 \alpha \beta \gamma \delta \epsilon \varepsilon \zeta \eta \Gamma \Delta \Theta θ ϑ ι κ λ µ ν ξ Λ Ξ Π \theta \vartheta \iota \kappa \lambda \mu \nu \xi \Lambda \Xi \Pi o π  ρ % σ ς τ Σ Υ Φ o \pi \varpi \rho \varrho \sigma \varsigma \tau \Sigma \Upsilon \Phi υ φ ϕ χ ψ ω \upsilon \phi \varphi \chi \psi \omega Ψ Ω \Psi \Omega The tables were derived from symbols.tex by David Carlisle and subsequently changed extensively as suggested by Josef Tkadlec. 76 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae Table 3.3: Binary Relations. You can negate the following symbols by prefixing them with a \not command. < ≤ ≺ ⊂ ⊆ @ v ∈  | ^ : < \leq or \le \ll \prec \preceq \subset \subseteq \sqsubset a \sqsubseteq \in \vdash \mid \smile : a > ≥ ⊃ ⊇ A w 3 a k _ ∈ / > \geq or \ge \gg \succ \succeq \supset \supseteq \sqsupset a \sqsupseteq \ni , \owns \dashv \parallel \frown \notin = ≡ . = ∼ ' ≈ ∼ = 1 ./ ∝ |= ⊥ 6= = \equiv \doteq \sim \simeq \approx \cong \Join a \bowtie \propto \models \perp \asymp \neq or \ne Use the latexsym package to access this symbol Table 3.4: Binary Operators. + ± · × ∪ t ∨ ⊕ ⊗ 4 + \pm \cdot \times \cup \sqcup \vee , \lor \oplus \odot \otimes \bigtriangleup \lhd a \unlhd a − ∓ ÷ \ ∩ u ∧ 5 \mp \div \setminus \cap \sqcap \wedge , \land \ominus \oslash \bigcirc \bigtriangledown \rhd a \unrhd a / . ? ∗ ◦ • ] q † ‡ o \triangleleft \triangleright \star \ast \circ \bullet \diamond \uplus \amalg \dagger \ddagger \wr 3.10 List of Mathematical Symbols 77 Table 3.5: BIG Operators. P Q  R L \sum \prod \coprod \int \bigoplus S T F H N \bigcup \bigcap \bigsqcup \oint \bigotimes W V U J \bigvee \bigwedge \biguplus \bigodot Table 3.6: Arrows. ← → ↔ ⇐ ⇒ ⇔ 7→ ←( ) ↑ l ⇓ % . ; \leftarrow or \gets \rightarrow or \to \leftrightarrow \Leftarrow \Rightarrow \Leftrightarrow \mapsto \hookleftarrow \leftharpoonup \leftharpoondown \rightleftharpoons \uparrow \updownarrow \Downarrow \nearrow \swarrow \leadsto a a ←− −→ ←→ ⇐= =⇒ ⇐⇒ 7−→ ,→ * + ⇐⇒ ↓ ⇑ m & - \longleftarrow \longrightarrow \longleftrightarrow \Longleftarrow \Longrightarrow \Longleftrightarrow \longmapsto \hookrightarrow \rightharpoonup \rightharpoondown \iff (bigger spaces) \downarrow \Uparrow \Updownarrow \searrow \nwarrow Use the latexsym package to access this symbol Table 3.7: Arrows as Accents. −−→ AB ←−− AB ←→ AB \overrightarrow{AB} \overleftarrow{AB} \overleftrightarrow{AB} AB −−→ AB ←−− AB ←→ \underrightarrow{AB} \underleftarrow{AB} \underleftrightarrow{AB} 78 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae Table 3.8: Delimiters. ( [ { h | / b e ) ] } i k \ c d ( [ or \lbrack \{ or \lbrace \langle | or \vert / \lfloor \rceil ) ] or \rbrack \} or \rbrace \rangle \| or \Vert \backslash \rfloor \lceil ↑ ↓ l ⇑ ⇓ m \uparrow \downarrow \updownarrow \Uparrow \Downarrow \Updownarrow Table 3.9: Large Delimiters.         w w \lgroup \arrowvert \rmoustache \rgroup \Arrowvert       \lmoustache \bracevert Table 3.10: Miscellaneous Symbols. ... ~ < ∀ 0 ∇ ⊥ ♦ ¬ \dots \hbar \Re \forall ’ \nabla \bot \diamondsuit \neg or \lnot a ··· ı = ∃ 0 4 > ♥ [ \cdots \imath \Im \exists \prime \triangle \top \heartsuit \flat .. .  ℵ f ∅ 2 ∠ ♣ \ \vdots \jmath \aleph \mho a \emptyset \Box a \angle \clubsuit \natural .. .  ℘ ∂ ∞ 3 √ ♠ ] \ddots \ell \wp \partial \infty \Diamond a \surd \spadesuit \sharp Use the latexsym package to access this symbol Table 3.11: Non-Mathematical Symbols. These symbols can also be used in text mode. † ‡ \dag \ddag § ¶ \S \P © £ \copyright \pounds ® % \textregistered \% 3.10 List of Mathematical Symbols 79 Table 3.12: AMS Delimiters. p | z \ulcorner \lvert \digamma q | \urcorner \rvert x k \llcorner \lVert y k \lrcorner \rVert Table 3.13: AMS Greek and Hebrew. κ \varkappa i \beth \gimel ‫ג‬ k \daleth Table 3.14: Math Alphabets. See Table 6.4 on 125 for other math fonts. Example ABCDEabcde1234 ABCDEabcde1234 ABCDEabcde1234 ABCDE A BC DE ABCDEabcde1234 ABCDEa1234 u n d Y | g Command \mathrm{ABCDE abcde 1234} \mathit{ABCDE abcde 1234} \mathnormal{ABCDE abcde 1234} \mathcal{ABCDE abcde 1234} \mathscr{ABCDE abcde 1234} \mathfrak{ABCDE abcde 1234} \mathbb{ABCDE abcde 1234} Required package mathrsfs amsfonts or amssymb amsfonts or amssymb Table 3.15: AMS Binary Operators. \dotplus \ltimes \doublecup \veebar \boxplus \boxtimes \intercal \curlyvee o e Z ~ f \centerdot \rtimes \doublecap \barwedge \boxminus \boxdot \circledast \curlywedge > r [  } i h \divideontimes \smallsetminus \doublebarwedge \circleddash \circledcirc \rightthreetimes \leftthreetimes 80 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae Table 3.16: AMS Binary Relations. l 6 0 5 ≪ . / ≶ Q S 4 2 w j q J B I D C E \lessdot \leqslant \eqslantless \leqq \lll or \llless \lesssim \lessapprox \lessgtr \lesseqgtr \lesseqqgtr \preccurlyeq \curlyeqprec \precsim \precapprox \subseteqq \shortparallel \blacktriangleleft \vartriangleright \blacktriangleright \trianglerighteq \vartriangleleft \trianglelefteq m > 1 = ≫ & ' ≷ R T < 3 % v k c A ∵ b a p ∴ \gtrdot \geqslant \eqslantgtr \geqq \ggg \gtrsim \gtrapprox \gtrless \gtreqless \gtreqqless \succcurlyeq \curlyeqsucc \succsim \succapprox \supseteqq \Supset \sqsupset \because \Subset \smallfrown \shortmid \therefore + : ; P  , l m ∼ ≈ u v w  ∝ G t  @ \doteqdot \risingdotseq \fallingdotseq \eqcirc \circeq \triangleq \bumpeq \Bumpeq \thicksim \thickapprox \approxeq \backsim \backsimeq \vDash \Vdash \Vvdash \backepsilon \varpropto \between \pitchfork \smallsmile \sqsubset 3.10 List of Mathematical Symbols L99 ⇔ W " x ( 81 Table 3.17: AMS Arrows. \dashleftarrow \leftleftarrows \leftrightarrows \Lleftarrow \twoheadleftarrow \leftarrowtail \leftrightharpoons \Lsh \looparrowleft \curvearrowleft \circlearrowleft \multimap \downdownarrows \upharpoonright \rightsquigarrow 99K ⇒ V # y ! \dashrightarrow \rightrightarrows \rightleftarrows \Rrightarrow \twoheadrightarrow \rightarrowtail \rightleftharpoons \Rsh \looparrowright \curvearrowright \circlearrowright \upuparrows \upharpoonleft \downharpoonright \leftrightsquigarrow 82 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae Table 3.18: AMS Negated Binary Relations and Arrows. *  \nless \lneq \nleq \nleqslant \lneqq \lvertneqq \nleqq \lnsim \lnapprox \nprec \npreceq \precneqq \precnsim \precnapprox \subsetneq \varsubsetneq \nsubseteq \subsetneqq ≯ ) ! + % \ngtr \gneq \ngeq \ngeqslant \gneqq \gvertneqq \ngeqq \gnsim \gnapprox \nsucc \nsucceq \succneqq \succnsim \succnapprox \supsetneq \varsupsetneq \nsupseteq \supsetneqq & ' " # ∦ . / 0 2 1 3 6 7 5 4 \varsubsetneqq \varsupsetneqq \nsubseteqq \nsupseteqq \nmid \nparallel \nshortmid \nshortparallel \nsim \ncong \nvdash \nvDash \nVdash \nVDash \ntriangleleft \ntriangleright \ntrianglelefteq \ntrianglerighteq 8 : \nleftarrow \nLeftarrow 9 ; \nrightarrow \nRightarrow = < \nleftrightarrow \nLeftrightarrow ≮ ⊀ ( Table 3.19: AMS Miscellaneous. ~ M O ♦ ∠ @ ð \hbar \square \vartriangle \triangledown \lozenge \angle \diagup \nexists \eth } N H ]  ^ \hslash \blacksquare \blacktriangle \blacktriangledown \blacklozenge \measuredangle \diagdown \Finv \sphericalangle k s { a F \Bbbk \circledS \complement \Game \bigstar 8 ∅ f \backprime \varnothing \mho Chapter 4 Specialities When putting together a large document, LATEX will help with some special features like index generation, bibliography management, and other things. A much more complete description of specialities and enhancements possible with LATEX can be found in the LATEX Manual [1] and The LATEX Companion [3]. 4.1 Including Encapsulated PostScript LATEX provides the basic facilities to work with floating bodies, such as images or graphics, with the figure and table environments. There are several ways to generate the actual graphics with basic LATEX or a LATEX extension package, a few of them are described in chapter 5. Please refer to The LATEX Companion [3] and the LATEX Manual [1] for more information on that subject. A much easier way to get graphics into a document is to generate them with a specialised software package1 and then include the finished graphics in the document. Here again, LATEX packages offer many ways to do this, but this introduction will only discuss the use of Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) graphics, because it is quite easy to do and widely used. In order to use pictures in the EPS format, you must have a PostScript printer2 available for output. A good set of commands for inclusion of graphics is provided in the graphicx package by D. P. Carlisle. It is part of a whole family of packages called the “graphics” bundle.3 When working on a system with a PostScript printer available for output and with the graphicx package installed, use the following step by 1 Such as XFig, Gnuplot, Gimp, Xara X . . . Another possibility to output PostScript is the GhostScript program available from CTAN://support/ghostscript. Windows and OS/2 users might want to look for GSview. 3 CTAN://pkg/graphics 2 84 Specialities step guide to include a picture into your document: 1. Export the picture from your graphics program in EPS format.4 2. Load the graphicx package in the preamble of the input file with \usepackage[driver]{graphicx} where driver is the name of your “dvi to PostScript” converter program. The most widely used program is called dvips. The name of the driver is required, because there is no standard on how graphics are included in TEX. Knowing the name of the driver, the graphicx package can choose the correct method to insert information about the graphics into the .dvi file, so that the printer understands it and can correctly include the .eps file. 3. Use the command \includegraphics[key=value, . . . ]{file} to include file into your document. The optional parameter accepts a comma separated list of keys and associated values. The keys can be used to alter the width, height and rotation of the included graphic. Table 4.1 lists the most important keys. Table 4.1: Key Names for graphicx Package. width height angle scale scale graphic to the specified width scale graphic to the specified height rotate graphic counterclockwise scale graphic 4 If your software cannot export into EPS format, you can try to install a PostScript printer driver (such as an Apple LaserWriter, for example) and then print to a file with this driver. With some luck this file will be in EPS format. Note that an EPS must not contain more than one page. Some printer drivers can be explicitly configured to produce EPS format. 4.2 Bibliography 85 The following example code may help to clarify things: \begin{figure} \centering \includegraphics[angle=90, width=0.5\textwidth]{test} \caption{This is a test.} \end{figure} It includes the graphic stored in the file test.eps. The graphic is first rotated by an angle of 90 degrees and then scaled to the final width of 0.5 times the width of a standard paragraph. The aspect ratio is 1.0, because no special height is specified. The width and height parameters can also be specified in absolute dimensions. Refer to Table 6.5 on page 130 for more information. If you want to know more about this topic, make sure to read [9] and [13]. 4.2 Bibliography Produce a bibliography with the thebibliography environment. Each entry starts with \bibitem[label]{marker} The marker is then used to cite the book, article or paper within the document. \cite{marker} If you do not use the label option, the entries will get enumerated automatically. The parameter after the \begin{thebibliography} command defines how much space to reserve for the number of labels. In the example below, {99} tells LATEX to expect that none of the bibliography item numbers will be wider than the number 99. Partl [1] has proposed that . . . Partl~\cite{pa} has proposed that \ldots \begin{thebibliography}{99} \bibitem{pa} H.~Partl: \emph{German \TeX}, TUGboat Volume~9, Issue~1 (1988) \end{thebibliography} Bibliography [1] H. Partl: German TEX, TUGboat Volume 9, Issue 1 (1988) 86 Specialities For larger projects, you might want to check out the BibTEX program. BibTEX is included with most TEX distributions. It allows you to maintain a bibliographic database and then extract the references relevant to things you cited in your paper. The visual presentation of BibTEX-generated bibliographies is based on a style-sheets concept that allows you to create bibliographies following a wide range of established designs. 4.3 Indexing A very useful feature of many books is their index. With LATEX and the support program makeindex,5 an index can be generated quite easily. This introduction will only explain the basic index generation commands. For a more in-depth view, please refer to The LATEX Companion [3]. To enable their indexing feature of LATEX, the makeidx package must be loaded in the preamble with \usepackage{makeidx} and the special indexing commands must be enabled by putting the \makeindex command in the preamble. The content of the index is specified with \index{key@formatted_entry} commands, where formatted_entry will appear in the index and key will be used for sorting. The formatted_entry is optional. If it is missing the key will be used. You enter the index commands at the points in the text that you want the final index entries to point to. Table 4.2 explains the syntax with several examples. When the input file is processed with LATEX, each \index command writes an appropriate index entry, together with the current page number, to a special file. The file has the same name as the LATEX input file, but a different extension (.idx). This .idx file can then be processed with the makeindex program: makeindex filename The makeindex program generates a sorted index with the same base file name, but this time with the extension .ind. If now the LATEX input file is 5 On systems not necessarily supporting filenames longer than 8 characters, the program may be called makeidx. 4.4 Fancy Headers 87 Table 4.2: Index Key Syntax Examples. Example \index{hello} \index{hello!Peter} \index{Sam@\textsl{Sam}} \index{Lin@\textbf{Lin}} \index{Kaese@K\"ase} \index{ecole@\’ecole} \index{Jenny|textbf} \index{Joe|textit} Index Entry hello, 1 Peter, 3 Sam, 2 Lin, 7 Käse, 33 école, 4 Jenny, 3 Joe, 5 Comment Plain entry Subentry under ‘hello’ Formatted entry Formatted entry Formatted entry Formatted entry Formatted page number Formatted page number processed again, this sorted index gets included into the document at the point where LATEX finds \printindex The showidx package that comes with LATEX 2ε prints out all index entries in the left margin of the text. This is quite useful for proofreading a document and verifying the index. Note that the \index command can affect your layout if not used carefully. My Word \index{Word}. As opposed to Word\index{Word}. Note the position of the full stop. My Word . As opposed to Word. Note the position of the full stop. makeindex has no clue about characters outside the ASCII range. To get the sorting correct, use the @ character as shown in the Käse and école examples above. 4.4 Fancy Headers The fancyhdr package,6 written by Piet van Oostrum, provides a few simple commands that allow you to customize the header and footer lines of your document. Look at the top of this page, for an application of this package. The tricky problem when customising headers and footers is to get things like running section and chapter names in there. LATEX accomplishes this with a two-stage approach. In the header and footer definition, you use the commands \rightmark and \leftmark to represent the current section 6 Available from CTAN://macros/latex/contrib/supported/fancyhdr. 88 Specialities \documentclass{book} \usepackage{fancyhdr} \pagestyle{fancy} % with this we ensure that the chapter and section % headings are in lowercase. \renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{% \markboth{#1}{}} \renewcommand{\sectionmark}[1]{% \markright{\thesection\ #1}} \fancyhf{} % delete current header and footer \fancyhead[LE,RO]{\bfseries\thepage} \fancyhead[LO]{\bfseries\rightmark} \fancyhead[RE]{\bfseries\leftmark} \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0.5pt} \renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt} \addtolength{\headheight}{0.5pt} % space for the rule \fancypagestyle{plain}{% \fancyhead{} % get rid of headers on plain pages \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0pt} % and the line } Figure 4.1: Example fancyhdr Setup. 4.5 The Verbatim Package and chapter heading, respectively. The values of these two commands are overwritten whenever a chapter or section command is processed. For ultimate flexibility, the \chapter command and its friends do not redefine \rightmark and \leftmark themselves. They call yet another command (\chaptermark, \sectionmark, or \subsectionmark) that is responsible for redefining \rightmark and \leftmark. If you want to change the look of the chapter name in the header line, you need only “renew” the \chaptermark command. Figure 4.1 shows a possible setup for the fancyhdr package that makes the headers look about the same as they look in this booklet. In any case, I suggest you fetch the documentation for the package at the address mentioned in the footnote. 4.5 The Verbatim Package Earlier in this book, you got to know the verbatim environment. In this section, you are going to learn about the verbatim package. The verbatim package is basically a re-implementation of the verbatim environment that works around some of the limitations of the original verbatim environment. This by itself is not spectacular, but the implementation of the verbatim package added new functionality, which is why I am mentioning the package here. The verbatim package provides the \verbatiminput{filename} command, which allows you to include raw ASCII text into your document as if it were inside a verbatim environment. As the verbatim package is part of the ‘tools’ bundle, you should find it pre-installed on most systems. If you want to know more about this package, make sure to read [10]. 4.6 Installing Extra Packages Most LATEX installations come with a large set of pre-installed style packages, but many more are available on the net. The main place to look for style packages on the Internet is CTAN (http://www.ctan.org/). Packages such as geometry, hyphenat, and many others are typically made up of two files: a file with the extension .ins and another with the extension .dtx. There will often be a readme.txt with a brief description of the package. You should of course read this file first. In any event, once you have copied the package files onto your machine, you still have to process them in a way that (a) tells your TEX distribution 89 90 Specialities about the new style package and (b) gives you the documentation. Here’s how you do the first part: 1. Run LATEX on the .ins file. This will extract a .sty file. 2. Move the .sty file to a place where your distribution can find it. Usually this is in your .../localtexmf /tex/latex subdirectory (Windows or OS/2 users should feel free to change the direction of the slashes). 3. Refresh your distribution’s file-name database. The command depends on the LATEXdistribution you use: TEXlive – texhash; web2c – maktexlsr; MiKTEX – initexmf --update-fndb or use the GUI. Now extract the documentation from the .dtx file: 1. Run LATEX on the .dtx file. This will generate a .dvi file. Note that you may have to run LATEX several times before it gets the cross-references right. 2. Check to see if LATEX has produced a .idx file among the various files you now have. If you do not see this file, then the documentation has no index. Continue with step 5. 3. In order to generate the index, type the following: makeindex -s gind.ist name (where name stands for the main-file name without any extension). 4. Run LATEX on the .dtx file once again. 5. Last but not least, make a .ps or .pdf file to increase your reading pleasure. Sometimes you will see that a .glo (glossary) file has been produced. Run the following command between step 4 and 5: makeindex -s gglo.ist -o name.gls name.glo Be sure to run LATEX on the .dtx one last time before moving on to step 5. 4.7 Working with pdf LATEX By Daniel Flipo <Daniel.Flipo@univ-lille1.fr> PDF is a portable hypertext document format. Much as in a web page, some words in the document are marked as hyperlinks. They link to other places in the document or even to other documents. If you click on such a hyperlink you get transported to the destination of the link. In the context of LATEX, this means that all occurrences of \ref and \pageref become hyperlinks. Additionally, the table of contents, the index and all the other similar structures become collections of hyperlinks. 4.7 Working with pdf LATEX Most web pages you find today are written in HTML (HyperText Markup Language). This format has two significant disadvantages when writing scientific documents: 1. Including mathematical formulae into HTML documents is not generally supported. While there is a standard for it, most browsers used today do not support it, or lack the required fonts. 2. Printing HTML documents is possible, but the results vary widely between platforms and browsers. The results are miles removed from the quality we have come to expect in the LATEX world. There have been many attempts to create translators from LATEX to HTML. Some were even quite successful in the sense that they are able to produce legible web pages from a standard LATEX input file. But all of them cut corners left and right to get the job done. As soon as you start using more complex LATEX features and external packages things tend to fall apart. Authors wishing to preserve the unique typographic quality of their documents even when publishing on the web turn to PDF (Portable Document Format), which preserves the layout of the document and permits hypertext navigation. Most modern browsers come with plugins that allow the direct display of PDF documents. Even though there are DVI and PS viewers for almost every platform, you will find that Acrobat Reader and Xpdf for viewing PDF documents are more widely deployed7 . So providing PDF versions of your documents will make them much more accessible to your potential readers. 4.7.1 PDF Documents for the Web The creation of a PDF file from LATEX source is very simple, thanks to the pdfTEX program developed by Hàn Thế Thành. pdfTEX produces PDF output where normal TEX produces DVI. There is also a pdfLATEX, which produces PDF output from LATEX sources. Both pdfTEX and pdfLATEX are installed automatically by most modern TEX distributions, such as teTEX, fpTEX, MikTEX, TEXLive and CMacTEX. To produce a PDF instead of DVI, it is sufficient to replace the command latex file.tex by pdflatex file.tex. On systems where LATEX is not called from the command line, you may find a special button in the TEX GUI. Set the paper size with an optional documentclass argument such as a4paper or letterpaper. This works in pdfLATEX too, but on top of this pdfTEX also needs to know the physical size of the paper to determine the physical size of the pages in the pdf file. If you use the hyperref package (see page 93), the papersize will be adjusted automatically. Otherwise you have 7 http://pdfreaders.org 91 92 Specialities to do this manually by putting the following lines into the preamble of the document: \pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth \pdfpageheight=\paperheight The following section will go into more detail regarding the differences between normal LATEX and pdfLATEX. The main differences concern three areas: the fonts to use, the format of images to include, and the manual configuration of hyperlinks. 4.7.2 The Fonts pdfLATEX can deal with all sorts of fonts (PK bitmaps, TrueType, PostScript type 1. . . ) but the normal LATEX font format, the bitmap PK fonts produce very ugly results when the document is displayed with Acrobat Reader. It is best to use PostScript Type 1 fonts exclusively to produce documents that display well. Modern TeX installations will be set up so that this happens automatically. Best is to try. If it works for you, just skip this whole section. The Type 1 font set most widely used today is called Latin Modern (LM). If you have a recent TEX installation, chances are that you already have a copy of them installed; all you need to do is to add \usepackage{lmodern} \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} \usepackage{textcomp} to the preamble of your document and you are all set for creating excellent PDF output with full support for the full Latin character set. If you are working with a stripped down setup, you may have to add the lm fonts explicitly. For the Russian language you may want to use C1 virtual fonts, available at ftp://ftp.vsu.ru/pub/tex/font-packs/c1fonts. These fonts combine the standard CM type 1 fonts from Bluesky collection and CMCYR type 1 fonts from the Paradissa and BaKoMa collection, all available on CTAN. Because Paradissa fonts contain only Russian letters, C1 fonts are missing other Cyrillic glyphs. Another solution is to switch to other PostScript type 1 fonts. Actually, some of them are even included with every copy of Acrobat Reader. Because these fonts have different character sizes, the text layout on your pages will change. Generally these other fonts will use more space than the CM fonts, which are very space-efficient. Also, the overall visual coherence of your document will suffer because Times, Helvetica and Courier (the primary candidates for such a replacement job) have not been designed to work in harmony in a single document. 4.7 Working with pdf LATEX Two ready-made font sets are available for this purpose: pxfonts, which is based on Palatino as its main text body font, and the txfonts package, which is based on Times. To use them it is sufficient to put the following lines into the preamble of your document: \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} \usepackage{pxfonts} You may find lines like Warning: pdftex (file eurmo10): Font eur... not found in the .log file after compiling your input file. They mean that some font used in the document has not been found. Make sure you identify and fix the offending parts of your document, as the resulting PDF document may not display the pages with the missing characters at all. 4.7.3 Using Graphics Including graphics into a document works best with the graphicx package (see page 83): \usepackage{xcolor,graphicx} In the sample above I have included the color package, as using color in documents displayed on the web comes quite naturally. So much for the good news. The bad news is that graphics in Encapsulated PostScript format do not work with pdfLATEX. If you don’t define a file extension in the \includegraphics command, graphicx will go looking for a suitable file on its own, depending on the setting of the driver option. For pdftex this is formats .png, .pdf, .jpg and .mps (METAPOST)—but not .eps. The simple way out of this problem is to just convert your EPS files into PDF format using the epstopdf utility found on many systems. For vector graphics (drawings) this is a great solution. For bitmaps (photos, scans) this is not ideal, because the PDF format natively supports the inclusion of PNG and JPEG images. PNG is good for screenshots and other images with few colours. JPEG is great for photos, as it is very space-efficient. It may even be desirable not to draw certain geometric figures, but rather describe the figure with a specialized command language, such as METAPOST, which can be found in most TEX distributions, and comes with its own extensive manual. 4.7.4 Hypertext Links The hyperref package will take care of turning all internal references of your document into hyperlinks. For this to work properly some magic is necessary, 93 94 Specialities so you have to put \usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref} as the last command into the preamble of your document. Many options are available to customize the behaviour of the hyperref package: • either as a comma separated list after the pdftex option \usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref} • or on individual lines with the command \hypersetup{options}. The only required option is pdftex; the others are optional and allow you to change the default behaviour of hyperref.8 In the following list the default values are written in an upright font. bookmarks (=true,false ) show or hide the bookmarks bar when displaying the document unicode (=false,true ) allows the use of characters of non-Latin based languages in Acrobat’s bookmarks pdftoolbar (=true,false ) show or hide Acrobat’s toolbar pdfmenubar (=true,false ) show or hide Acrobat’s menu pdffitwindow (=false,true ) adjust the initial magnification of the PDF when displayed pdftitle (={text}) define the title that gets displayed in the Document Info window of Acrobat pdfauthor (={text}) the name of the PDF’s author pdfnewwindow (=false,true ) define whether a new window should be opened when a link leads out of the current document colorlinks (=false,true ) surround the links by colour frames (false) or colour the text of the links (true). The colour of these links can be configured using the following options (default colours are shown): linkcolor (=red) colour of internal links (sections, pages, etc.) citecolor (=green) colour of citation links (bibliography) filecolor (=magenta) colour of file links urlcolor (=cyan) colour of URL links (mail, web) 8 It is worth noting that the hyperref package is not limited to work with pdfTEX. It can also be configured to embed PDF-specific information into the DVI output of normal LATEX, which then gets put into the PS file by dvips and is finally picked up by the pdf convertor when turning the PS file into PDF. 4.7 Working with pdf LATEX If you are happy with the defaults, use \usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref} To have the bookmark list open and links in colour (the =true values are optional): \usepackage[pdftex,bookmarks,colorlinks]{hyperref} When creating PDFs destined for printing, coloured links are not a good thing as they end up in gray in the final output, making it difficult to read. Use colour frames, which are not printed: \usepackage{hyperref} \hypersetup{colorlinks=false} or make links black: \usepackage{hyperref} \hypersetup{colorlinks,% citecolor=black,% filecolor=black,% linkcolor=black,% urlcolor=black,% pdftex} When you just want to provide information for the Document Info section of the PDF file: \usepackage[pdfauthor={Pierre Desproges},% pdftitle={Des femmes qui tombent},% pdftex]{hyperref} In addition to the automatic hyperlinks for cross references, it is possible to embed explicit links using \href{url}{text} The code The \href{http://www.ctan.org}{CTAN} website. produces the output “CTAN”; a click on the word “CTAN” will take you to the CTAN website. If the destination of the link is not a URL but a local file, use the \href command without the ’http://’ bit: The complete document is \href{manual.pdf}{here} 95 96 Specialities which produces the text “The complete document is here”. A click on the word “here” will open the file manual.pdf. (The filename is relative to the location of the current document). The author of an article might want her readers to easily send email messages by using the \href command inside the \author command on the title page of the document: \author{Mary Oetiker <\href{mailto:mary@oetiker.ch}% {mary@oetiker.ch}> Note that I have put the link so that my email address appears not only in the link but also on the page itself. I did this because the link \href{mailto:mary@oetiker.ch}{Mary Oetiker} would work well within Acrobat, but once the page is printed the email address would not be visible anymore. 4.7.5 Problems with Links Messages like the following: ! pdfTeX warning (ext4): destination with the same identifier (name{page.1}) has been already used, duplicate ignored appear when a counter gets reinitialized, for example by using the command \mainmatter provided by the book document class. It resets the page number counter to 1 prior to the first chapter of the book. But as the preface of the book also has a page number 1 all links to “page 1” would not be unique anymore, hence the notice that “duplicate has been ignored.” The counter measure consists of putting plainpages=false into the hyperref options. This unfortunately only helps with the page counter. An even more radical solution is to use the option hypertexnames=false, but this will cause the page links in the index to stop working. 4.7.6 Problems with Bookmarks The text displayed by bookmarks does not always look like you expect it to look. Because bookmarks are “just text,” fewer characters are available for bookmarks than for normal LATEX text. Hyperref will normally notice such problems and put up a warning: Package hyperref Warning: Token not allowed in a PDFDocEncoded string: 4.7 Working with pdf LATEX Work around this problem by providing a text string for the bookmarks, which replaces the offending text: \texorpdfstring{TEX text}{Bookmark Text} Math expressions are a prime candidate for this kind of problem: \section{\texorpdfstring{E=mc^2}% {E = mc ** 2}} which turns \section{E=mc^2} to “E = mc ** 2” in the bookmark area. If you write your document in Unicode and use the unicode option for the hyperref package to use Unicode characters in bookmarks, this will give you a much larger selection of characters to pick from when when using \texorpdfstring. 4.7.7 Source Compatibility Between LATEX and pdf LATEX Ideally your document would compile equally well with LATEX and pdfLATEX. The main problem in this respect is the inclusion of graphics. The simple solution is to systematically drop the file extension from \includegraphics commands. They will then automatically look for a file of a suitable format in the current directory. All you have to do is create appropriate versions of the graphics files. LATEX will look for .eps, and pdfLATEX will try to include a file with the extension .png, .pdf, .jpg or .mps (in that order). For the cases where you want to use different code for the PDF version of your document, simply add the package ifpdf 9 to your preamble. Chances are that you already have it installed; if not then you’re probably using MiKTEX which will install it for you automatically the first time you try to use it. This package defines the special command \ifpdf that will allow you to write conditional code easily. In this example, we want the PostScript version to be black and white due to the printing costs but we want the PDF version for online viewing to be colourful. \RequirePackage{ifpdf} % are we producing PDF ? \documentclass[a4paper,12pt]{book} \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} \usepackage{lmodern} \usepackage[bookmarks, % tune hyperref colorlinks, plainpages=false]{hyperref} \usepackage{graphicx} 9 If you want the whole story on why to use this package then go to the TEX FAQ under the item http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=ifpdf. 97 98 Specialities \ifpdf \hypersetup{linkscolor=blue} \else \hypersetup{linkscolors=black} \fi \usepackage[english]{babel} ... In the example above I have included the hyperref package even in the non-PDF version. The effect of this is to make the \href command work in all cases, which saves me from wrapping every occurrence into a conditional statement. Note that in recent TEX distributions (like TEXLive, MacTEX$$and$$MiKTEX), the normal TEX program is actually pdfTEX and it will automatically switch between producing pdf and dvi according to the name it is called with: use the pdflatex command to get pdf output and latex for normal dvi output. 4.8 Working with XELATEX By Axel Kielhorn <A.Kielhorn@web.de> Most of the things said about pdfLATEX are valid for XELATEX as well. There is a Wiki at http://wiki.xelatex.org/doku.php that collects information relevant to XETEX and XELATEX. 4.8.1 The Fonts In addition to the normal tfm based fonts, XELATEX is able to use any font known to the operating system. If you have the Linux Libertine fonts installed, you can simply say \usepackage{fontspec} \setmainfont[Ligatures=TeX]{Linux Libertine} in the preamble. This will normally detect the italic and bold versions as well, so \textit and \textbf will work as usual. When the font is using OpenType technology you have access to many features which required switching to a separate font or using virtual fonts in the past. The main feature is the extended character set; a font may contain Latin, Greek$$and$$Cyrillic characters and the corresponding ligatures. Many fonts contain at least two kinds of numerals, the normal lining numerals and so called old style (or lower case) numerals, which partly extend below the baseline. They may contain proportional numerals (the “1” takes less space than the “0”) or monospaced numerals which are suitable for tables. 4.8 Working with XELATEX 99 \newfontfamily\LLln[Numbers=Lining]{(font)} \newfontfamily\LLos[Numbers=OldStyle]{(font)} \newfontfamily\LLlnm[Numbers=Lining,Numbers=Monospaced]{(font)} \newfontfamily\LLosm[Numbers=OldStyle,Numbers=Monospaced]{(font)} Almost all OpenType fonts contain the standard ligatures (fl fi ffi) but there are also some rare or historical ligatures like st, ct and tz. You may not want to use them in a technical report but they are fine for a novel. To enable these ligatures use either of the following lines: \setmainfont[Ligatures=Rare]{(font)} \setmainfont[Ligatures=Historic]{(font)} \setmainfont[Ligatures=Historic,Ligatures=Rare]{(font)} Not every font contains both sets of ligature, consult the font documentation or just try it out. Sometimes these ligatures are language dependent; for example a ligature used in Polish (fk) is not used in English. You have to add \setmainfont[Language=Polish]{(font)} to enable the Polish ligatures. Some fonts (like the commercial Adobe Garamond Premier Pro) contain alternative glyphs that are activated by default in XELATEX distributed with TEXLive 201010 . The result is a stylish “Q” with a descender reaching below the following “u”. To disable this feature you have to define the font with disabled contextuals: \setmainfont[Contextuals=NoAlternate]{(font)} To learn about fonts in XELATEX read the fontspec manual. Where do I get OpenType fonts? If you have TeXLive installed, you already have some at .../texmf-dist/ fonts/opentype, just install them in your operating system. This collection does not include DejaVu, which is available at http://dejavu-fonts.org/. Make sure that each font is only installed once, otherwise interesting results may happen. You can use every font installed on your computer, but remember that other users may not have these fonts. The Zapfino font used in the fontspec manual is included in Mac OSX, but is not available on Windows computers.11 10 11 The behavior has changed with this version, it was off by default in earlier releases. A commercial version of the font called Zapfino Extra is available. 100 Specialities Entering Unicode Characters The number of characters in a font has grown but the number of keys on a regular keyboard has not. So, how do I enter non-ASCII characters? If you write a large amount of text in a foreign language, you can install a keyboard for that language and print out the character positions. (Most operatings system have some sort of virtual keyboard, just make a screenshot.) If you rarely need an exotic character, you can simply pick it in the character palette. Some environments (e. g. the X Window System) offer many methods to enter non-ASCII characters. Some editors (e. g. Vim and Emacs) offer ways to enter these characters. Read the manual for the tools you are using. 4.8.2 Compatibility Between XELATEX and pdfLATEX There are a few things that are different between XELATEX and pdfLATEX. • A XELATEX document has to be written in Unicode (UTF-8) while pdfLATEX may use different input encodings. • The microtype packages does not work with XELATEX yet, support for character protrusion is already under development. • Everything font related has to be reviewed. (Unless you want to stick to Latin Modern.) 4.9 Creating Presentations By Daniel Flipo <Daniel.Flipo@univ-lille1.fr> You can present the results of your scientific work on a blackboard, with transparencies, or directly from your laptop using some presentation software. pdfLATEX combined with the beamer class allows you to create presentations in PDF, looking much like something you might be able to generate with LibreOffice or PowerPoint if you had a very good day, but much more portable because PDF readers are available on many more systems. The beamer class uses graphicx, color and hyperref with options adapted to screen presentations. When you compile the code presented in figure 4.2 with pdfLATEX you get a PDF file with a title page and a second page showing several items that will be revealed one at a time as you step though your presentation. One of the advantages of the beamer class is that it produces a PDF file that is directly usable without first going through a PostScript stage like prosper or requiring additional post processing like presentations created with the ppower4 package. 4.9 Creating Presentations \documentclass[10pt]{beamer} \mode<beamer>{% \usetheme[hideothersubsections, right,width=22mm]{Goettingen} } \title{Simple Presentation} \author[D. Flipo]{Daniel Flipo} \institute{U.S.T.L. \& GUTenberg} \titlegraphic{\includegraphics[width=20mm]{USTL}} \date{2005} \begin{document} \begin{frame}<handout:0> \titlepage \end{frame} \section{An Example} \begin{frame} \frametitle{Things to do on a Sunday Afternoon} \begin{block}{One could \ldots} \begin{itemize} \item walk the dog\dots \pause \item read a book\pause \item confuse a cat\pause \end{itemize} \end{block} and many other things \end{frame} \end{document} Figure 4.2: Sample code for the beamer class 101 102 Specialities With the beamer class you can produce several versions (modes) of your document from the same input file. The input file may contain special instructions for the different modes in angular brackets. The following modes are available: beamer for the presentation PDF discussed above. trans for transparencies. handout for the printed version. The default mode is beamer, change it by setting a different mode as a global option, like \documentclass[10pt,handout]{beamer} to print the handouts for example. The look of the screen presentation depends on the theme you choose. Pick one of the themes shipped with the beamer class or create your own. See the beamer class documentation in beameruserguide.pdf for more information on this. Let’s have a closer look at the code in figure 4.2. For the screen version of the presentation \mode<beamer> we have chosen the Goettingen theme to show a navigation panel integrated into the table of contents. The options allow us to choose the size of the panel (22 mm in this case) and its position (on the right side of the body text). The option hideothersubsections, shows the chapter titles, but only the subsections of the present chapter. There are no special settings for \mode<trans>$$and$$\mode<handout>. They appear in their standard layout. The commands \title{}, \author{}, \institute{},$$and$$\titlegraphic{} set the content of the title page. The optional arguments of \title[]{} and \author[]{} let you specify a special version of the title and the author name to be displayed on the panel of the Goettingen theme. The titles and subtitles in the panel are created with normal \section{} and \subsection{} commands that you place outside the frame environment. The tiny navigation icons at the bottom of the screen also allow to navigate the document. Their presence is not dependent on the theme you choose. The contents of each slide or screen has to be placed inside a frame environment. There is an optional argument in angular brackets (<$$and$$>), it allows us to suppress a particular frame in one of the versions of the presentation. In the example the first page would not be shown in the handout version due to the <handout:0> argument. It is highly recommended to set a title for each slide apart from the title slide. This is done with the command \frametitle{}. If a subtitle is necessary use the block environment as shown in the example. Note that the sectioning commands \section{} and \subsection{} do not produce output on the slide proper. 4.9 Creating Presentations The command \pause in the itemize environment lets you reveal the items one by one. For other presentation effects check out the commands \only, \uncover, \alt and \temporal. In many place it is possible to use angular brackets to further customize the presentation. In any case make sure to read through the beamer class documentation beameruserguide.pdf to get a complete picture of what is in store for you. This package is being actively developed, check out their website to get the latest information. (http://latex-beamer.sourceforge.net/) 103 Chapter 5 Producing Mathematical Graphics Most people use LATEX for typesetting their text. And since the structure oriented approach to authoring is so convenient, LATEX also offers a, if somewhat restricted, means for producing graphical output from textual descriptions. Furthermore, quite a number of LATEX extensions have been created in order to overcome these restrictions. In this section, you will learn about a few of them. 5.1 Overview Creating graphical output with LATEX has a long tradition. It started out with the picture environment which allows you to create graphics by cleverly placing predefined elements onto the canvas. A complete description can be found in the LATEX Manual [1]. The picture environment of LATEX 2ε brings with it the \qbezier command, “q” meaning “quadratic”. Many frequently used curves such as circles, ellipses, or catenaries can be satisfactorily approximated by quadratic Bézier curves, although this may require some mathematical toil. If, in addition, a programming language is used to generate \qbezier blocks of LATEX input files, the picture environment becomes quite powerful. Although programming pictures directly in LATEX is severely restricted, and often rather tiresome, there are still reasons for doing so. The documents thus produced are “small” with respect to bytes, and there are no additional graphics files to be dragged along. This has been the state of things until a few years ago when Till Tantau of beamer fame came up with the Portable Graphics Format pgf and its companion package TikZ (tikz). This system lets you create high quality vector graphics with all current TEX systems including full support for pdf. Building on these basics, numerous packages have been written for specific 106 Producing Mathematical Graphics purposes. A wide variety of these packages is described in detail in The LATEX Graphics Companion [4]. Perhaps the most advanced graphical tool related with LATEX is METAPOST. It is a stand-alone application based on Donald E. Knuth’s METAFONT. METAPOST has the very powerful and mathematically sophisticated programming language of METAFONT but contrary to METAFONT, it generates encapsulated PostScript files, which can be imported in LATEX and even pdfLATEX. For an introduction, see A User’s Manual for METAPOST [15], or the tutorial on [17]. A very thorough discussion of LATEX and TEX strategies for graphics (and fonts) can be found in TEX Unbound [16]. 5.2 The picture Environment By Urs Oswald <osurs@bluewin.ch> As mentioned above the picture environment is part of standard LATEX and it is great for simple tasks and also if you want to control the exact positioning of individual elements on a page. But if you are about to do any serious graphics work, you should look at TikZ as presented in section 5.3 on page 115. 5.2.1 Basic Commands A picture environment1 is created with one of the two commands \begin{picture}(x, y). . . \end{picture} or \begin{picture}(x, y)(x0 , y0 ). . . \end{picture} The numbers x, y, x0 , y0 refer to \unitlength, which can be reset any time (but not within a picture environment) with a command such as \setlength{\unitlength}{1.2cm} The default value of \unitlength is 1pt. The first pair, (x, y), effects the reservation, within the document, of rectangular space for the picture. The optional second pair, (x0 , y0 ), assigns arbitrary coordinates to the bottom left corner of the reserved rectangle. 1 Believe it or not, the picture environment works out of the box, with standard LATEX 2ε no package loading necessary. 5.2 The picture Environment 107 Most drawing commands have one of the two forms \put(x, y){object} or \multiput(x, y)(∆x, ∆y){n}{object} Bézier curves are an exception. They are drawn with the command \qbezier(x1 , y1 )(x2 , y2 )(x3 , y3 ) 5.2.2 Line Segments \setlength{\unitlength}{5cm} \begin{picture}(1,1) \put(0,0){\line(0,1){1}} \put(0,0){\line(1,0){1}} \put(0,0){\line(1,1){1}} \put(0,0){\line(1,2){.5}} \put(0,0){\line(1,3){.3333}} \put(0,0){\line(1,4){.25}} \put(0,0){\line(1,5){.2}} \put(0,0){\line(1,6){.1667}} \put(0,0){\line(2,1){1}} \put(0,0){\line(2,3){.6667}} \put(0,0){\line(2,5){.4}} \put(0,0){\line(3,1){1}} \put(0,0){\line(3,2){1}} \put(0,0){\line(3,4){.75}} \put(0,0){\line(3,5){.6}} \put(0,0){\line(4,1){1}} \put(0,0){\line(4,3){1}} \put(0,0){\line(4,5){.8}} \put(0,0){\line(5,1){1}} \put(0,0){\line(5,2){1}} \put(0,0){\line(5,3){1}} \put(0,0){\line(5,4){1}} \put(0,0){\line(5,6){.8333}} \put(0,0){\line(6,1){1}} \put(0,0){\line(6,5){1}} \end{picture} % % % , % , # # , % # , % # , % # " " , # " % ," # % # " , " ! ! , % # " ! "!! , % # " !! , # % " ! , # " ! ( ( % ! ( ( " , # ! ((( " ! ( ( % ( , # ! " ! ((( ( ( , % " # ! 108 Producing Mathematical Graphics Line segments are drawn with the command \put(x, y){\line(x1 , y1 ){length}} The \line command has two arguments: 1. a direction vector, 2. a length. The components of the direction vector are restricted to the integers −6, −5, . . . , 5, 6, and they have to be coprime (no common divisor except 1). The figure illustrates all 25 possible slope values in the first quadrant. The length is relative to \unitlength. The length argument is the vertical coordinate in the case of a vertical line segment, the horizontal coordinate in all other cases. 5.2.3 Arrows \setlength{\unitlength}{0.75mm} \begin{picture}(60,40) \put(30,20){\vector(1,0){30}} \put(30,20){\vector(4,1){20}} \put(30,20){\vector(3,1){25}} \put(30,20){\vector(2,1){30}} \put(30,20){\vector(1,2){10}} \thicklines \put(30,20){\vector(-4,1){30}} \put(30,20){\vector(-1,4){5}} \thinlines \put(30,20){\vector(-1,-1){5}} \put(30,20){\vector(-1,-4){5}} \end{picture} OCC * 1 y X XXX C : XXXC C Arrows are drawn with the command \put(x, y){\vector(x1 , y1 ){length}} For arrows, the components of the direction vector are even more narrowly restricted than for line segments, namely to the integers −4, −3, . . . , 3, 4. Components also have to be coprime (no common divisor except 1). Notice the effect of the \thicklines command on the two arrows pointing to the upper left. 5.2 The picture Environment 5.2.4 109 Circles \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} \begin{picture}(60, 40) \put(20,30){\circle{1}} \put(20,30){\circle{2}} \put(20,30){\circle{4}} \put(20,30){\circle{8}} \put(20,30){\circle{16}} \put(20,30){\circle{32}} \put(40,30){\circle{1}} \put(40,30){\circle{2}} \put(40,30){\circle{3}} \put(40,30){\circle{4}} \put(40,30){\circle{5}} \put(40,30){\circle{6}} \put(40,30){\circle{7}} \put(40,30){\circle{8}} \put(40,30){\circle{9}} \put(40,30){\circle{10}} \put(40,30){\circle{11}} \put(40,30){\circle{12}} \put(40,30){\circle{13}} \put(40,30){\circle{14}} ' ' # j be m j h be "! &% &% r u x z} \put(15,10){\circle*{1}} \put(20,10){\circle*{2}} \put(25,10){\circle*{3}} \put(30,10){\circle*{4}} \put(35,10){\circle*{5}} \end{picture} The command \put(x, y){\circle{diameter}} draws a circle with center (x, y) and diameter (not radius) diameter. The picture environment only admits diameters up to approximately 14 mm, and even below this limit, not all diameters are possible. The \circle* command produces disks (filled circles). As in the case of line segments, one may have to resort to additional packages, such as eepic or pstricks. For a thorough description of these packages, see The LATEX Graphics Companion [4]. There is also a possibility within the picture environment. If one is not afraid of doing the necessary calculations (or leaving them to a program), arbitrary circles and ellipses can be patched together from quadratic Bézier curves. See Graphics in LATEX 2ε [17] for examples and Java source files. 110 Producing Mathematical Graphics 5.2.5 Text and Formulas \setlength{\unitlength}{0.8cm} \begin{picture}(6,5) \thicklines \put(1,0.5){\line(2,1){3}} \put(4,2){\line(-2,1){2}} \put(2,3){\line(-2,-5){1}} \put(0.7,0.3){A} \put(4.05,1.9){B} \put(1.7,2.95){C} \put(3.1,2.5){a} \put(1.3,1.7){b} \put(2.5,1.05){c} \put(0.3,4){F= \sqrt{s(s-a)(s-b)(s-c)}} \put(3.5,0.4){\displaystyle s:=\frac{a+b+c}{2}} \end{picture} F = p s(s − a)(s − b)(s − c) CH HHa H HB b c a+b+c s := A 2 As this example shows, text and formulas can be written into a picture environment with the \put command in the usual way. 5.2.6 \multiput and \linethickness \setlength{\unitlength}{2mm} \begin{picture}(30,20) \linethickness{0.075mm} \multiput(0,0)(1,0){26}% {\line(0,1){20}} \multiput(0,0)(0,1){21}% {\line(1,0){25}} \linethickness{0.15mm} \multiput(0,0)(5,0){6}% {\line(0,1){20}} \multiput(0,0)(0,5){5}% {\line(1,0){25}} \linethickness{0.3mm} \multiput(5,0)(10,0){2}% {\line(0,1){20}} \multiput(0,5)(0,10){2}% {\line(1,0){25}} \end{picture} The command \multiput(x, y)(∆x, ∆y){n}{object} has 4 arguments: the starting point, the translation vector from one object 5.2 The picture Environment 111 to the next, the number of objects, and the object to be drawn. The \linethickness command applies to horizontal and vertical line segments, but neither to oblique line segments, nor to circles. It does, however, apply to quadratic Bézier curves! 5.2.7 Ovals \setlength{\unitlength}{0.75cm} \begin{picture}(6,4) \linethickness{0.075mm} \multiput(0,0)(1,0){7}% {\line(0,1){4}} \multiput(0,0)(0,1){5}% {\line(1,0){6}} \thicklines \put(2,3){\oval(3,1.8)} \thinlines \put(3,2){\oval(3,1.8)} \thicklines \put(2,1){\oval(3,1.8)[tl]} \put(4,1){\oval(3,1.8)[b]} \put(4,3){\oval(3,1.8)[r]} \put(3,1.5){\oval(1.8,0.4)} \end{picture} # # " ! ! # ! " " ! The command \put(x, y){\oval(w, h)} or \put(x, y){\oval(w, h)[position]} produces an oval centered at (x, y) and having width w and height h. The optional position arguments b, t, l, r refer to “top”, “bottom”, “left”, “right”, and can be combined, as the example illustrates. Line thickness can be controlled by two kinds of commands: \linethickness{length} on the one hand, \thinlines and \thicklines on the other. While \linethickness{length} applies only to horizontal$$and$$vertical lines (and quadratic Bézier curves), \thinlines and \thicklines apply to oblique line segments as well as to circles and ovals. 112 Producing Mathematical Graphics 5.2.8 Multiple Use of Predefined Picture Boxes \setlength{\unitlength}{0.5mm} \begin{picture}(120,168) \newsavebox{\foldera} \savebox{\foldera} (40,32)[bl]{% definition \multiput(0,0)(0,28){2} {\line(1,0){40}} \multiput(0,0)(40,0){2} {\line(0,1){28}} \put(1,28){\oval(2,2)[tl]} \put(1,29){\line(1,0){5}} \put(9,29){\oval(6,6)[tl]} \put(9,32){\line(1,0){8}} \put(17,29){\oval(6,6)[tr]} \put(20,29){\line(1,0){19}} \put(39,28){\oval(2,2)[tr]} } \newsavebox{\folderb} \savebox{\folderb} (40,32)[l]{% definition \put(0,14){\line(1,0){8}} \put(8,0){\usebox{\foldera}} } \put(34,26){\line(0,1){102}} \put(14,128){\usebox{\foldera}} \multiput(34,86)(0,-37){3} {\usebox{\folderb}} \end{picture} A picture box can be declared by the command \newsavebox{name} then defined by \savebox{name}(width,height)[position]{content} and finally arbitrarily often be drawn by \put(x, y){\usebox{name}} The optional position parameter has the effect of defining the ‘anchor point’ of the savebox. In the example it is set to bl which puts the anchor point into the bottom left corner of the savebox. The other position specifiers are top and right. 5.2 The picture Environment 113 The name argument refers to a LATEX storage bin and therefore is of a command nature (which accounts for the backslashes in the current example). Boxed pictures can be nested: In this example, \foldera is used within the definition of \folderb. The \oval command had to be used as the \line command does not work if the segment length is less than about 3 mm. 5.2.9 Quadratic Bézier Curves \setlength{\unitlength}{0.8cm} \begin{picture}(6,4) \linethickness{0.075mm} \multiput(0,0)(1,0){7} {\line(0,1){4}} \multiput(0,0)(0,1){5} {\line(1,0){6}} \thicklines \put(0.5,0.5){\line(1,5){0.5}} \put(1,3){\line(4,1){2}} \qbezier(0.5,0.5)(1,3)(3,3.5) \thinlines \put(2.5,2){\line(2,-1){3}} \put(5.5,0.5){\line(-1,5){0.5}} \linethickness{1mm} \qbezier(2.5,2)(5.5,0.5)(5,3) \thinlines \qbezier(4,2)(4,3)(3,3) \qbezier(3,3)(2,3)(2,2) \qbezier(2,2)(2,1)(3,1) \qbezier(3,1)(4,1)(4,2) \end{picture} HH H D D D D HH D HHD As this example illustrates, splitting up a circle into 4 quadratic Bézier curves is not satisfactory. At least 8 are needed. The figure again shows the effect of the \linethickness command on horizontal or vertical lines, and of the \thinlines and the \thicklines commands on oblique line segments. It also shows that both kinds of commands affect quadratic Bézier curves, each command overriding all previous ones. Let P1 = (x1 , y1 ), P2 = (x2 , y2 ) denote the end points, and m1 , m2 the respective slopes, of a quadratic Bézier curve. The intermediate control point S = (x, y) is then given by the equations    rclx =   m2 x2 − m1 x1 − (y2 − y1 ) , m2 − m1 y = yi + mi (x − xi ) (i = 1, 2). (5.1) See Graphics in LATEX 2ε [17] for a Java program which generates the necessary \qbezier command line. 114 Producing Mathematical Graphics 5.2.10 Catenary \setlength{\unitlength}{1cm} \begin{picture}(4.3,3.6)(-2.5,-0.25) \put(-2,0){\vector(1,0){4.4}} \put(2.45,-.05){x} \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){3.2}} \put(0,3.35){\makebox(0,0){y}} \qbezier(0.0,0.0)(1.2384,0.0) (2.0,2.7622) \qbezier(0.0,0.0)(-1.2384,0.0) (-2.0,2.7622) \linethickness{.075mm} \multiput(-2,0)(1,0){5} {\line(0,1){3}} \multiput(-2,0)(0,1){4} {\line(1,0){4}} \linethickness{.2mm} \put( .3,.12763){\line(1,0){.4}} \put(.5,-.07237){\line(0,1){.4}} \put(-.7,.12763){\line(1,0){.4}} u \put(-.5,-.07237){\line(0,1){.4}} \put(.8,.54308){\line(1,0){.4}} \put(1,.34308){\line(0,1){.4}} \put(-1.2,.54308){\line(1,0){.4}} \put(-1,.34308){\line(0,1){.4}} \put(1.3,1.35241){\line(1,0){.4}} \put(1.5,1.15241){\line(0,1){.4}} \put(-1.7,1.35241){\line(1,0){.4}} \put(-1.5,1.15241){\line(0,1){.4}} \put(-2.5,-0.25){\circle*{0.2}} \end{picture} y 6 -x In this figure, each symmetric half of the catenary y = cosh x − 1 is approximated by a quadratic Bézier curve. The right half of the curve ends in the point (2, 2.7622), the slope there having the value m = 3.6269. Using again equation (5.1), we can calculate the intermediate control points. They turn out to be (1.2384, 0) and (−1.2384, 0). The crosses indicate points of the real catenary. The error is barely noticeable, being less than one percent. This example points out the use of the optional argument of the \begin{picture} command. The picture is defined in convenient “mathematical” coordinates, whereas by the command \begin{picture}(4.3,3.6)(-2.5,-0.25) its lower left corner (marked by the black disk) is assigned the coordinates (−2.5, −0.25). 5.3 The PGF and TikZ Graphics Packages 5.2.11 115 Rapidity in the Special Theory of Relativity \setlength{\unitlength}{0.8cm} \begin{picture}(6,4)(-3,-2) \put(-2.5,0){\vector(1,0){5}} \put(2.7,-0.1){\chi} \put(0,-1.5){\vector(0,1){3}} \multiput(-2.5,1)(0.4,0){13} {\line(1,0){0.2}} \multiput(-2.5,-1)(0.4,0){13} {\line(1,0){0.2}} \put(0.2,1.4) {\beta=v/c=\tanh\chi} \qbezier(0,0)(0.8853,0.8853) (2,0.9640) \qbezier(0,0)(-0.8853,-0.8853) (-2,-0.9640) \put(-3,-2){\circle*{0.2}} \end{picture} β = v/c = tanh χ 6 - χ t The control points of the two Bézier curves were calculated with formulas (5.1). The positive branch is determined by P1 = (0, 0), m1 = 1 and P2 = (2, tanh 2), m2 = 1/ cosh2 2. Again, the picture is defined in mathematically convenient coordinates, and the lower left corner is assigned the mathematical coordinates (−3, −2) (black disk). 5.3 The PGF and TikZ Graphics Packages Today every LATEX output generation system can create nice vector graphics, it’s just the interfaces that are rather diverse. The pgf package provides an abstraction layer over these interface. The pgf package comes with a large manual/tutorial of its own [18]. So we are only going to scratch the surface of the package with this little section. The pgf package comes with a high level access language provided by the tikz package. TikZ provides highly efficient commands to draw graphics right from inside your document. Use the tikzpicture environment to wrap your TikZ commands. As mentioned above, there is an excellent manual for pgf and friends. So instead of actually explaining how it works, I will just show you a few examples so that you can get a first impression of how this tool works. First a simple nonsense diagram. 116 Producing Mathematical Graphics \begin{tikzpicture}[scale=3] \clip (-0.1,-0.2) rectangle (1.8,1.2); \draw[step=.25cm,gray,very thin] (-1.4,-1.4) grid (3.4,3.4); \draw (-1.5,0) -- (2.5,0); \draw (0,-1.5) -- (0,1.5); \draw (0,0) circle (1cm); \filldraw[fill=green!20!white, draw=green!50!black] (0,0) -- (3mm,0mm) arc (0:30:3mm) -- cycle; \end{tikzpicture} Note the semicolon (;) character. It separates the individual commands. A simple Venn diagram. \shorthandoff{:} \begin{tikzpicture} \node[circle,draw, minimum size=3cm, label=120:{economics}] at (0,0) {}; \node[circle,draw, minimum size=3cm, label=60:{psychology}] at (1,0) {}; \node (i) at (0.5,-1) {}; \node at (0.6,-2.5) {behavioral economics} edge[->,thick, out=60,in=-60] (i); \end{tikzpicture} economics psychology behavioral economics If you are using tikz in connection with babel some of the characters used in the TikZ language may get modified by babel, leading to odd errors. To counteract this, add the \shorthandoff command to your code. Note the foreach loops in the next example. 5.3 The PGF and TikZ Graphics Packages 117 \begin{tikzpicture}[scale=0.8] \tikzstyle{v}=[circle, minimum size=2mm,inner sep=0pt,draw] \foreach \i in {1,...,8} \foreach \j in {1,...,3} \node[v] (G-\i-\j) at (\i,\j) {}; \foreach \i in {1,...,8} \foreach \j/\o in {1/2,2/3} \draw[->] (G-\i-\j) -- (G-\i-\o); \foreach \i/\n in {1/2,2/3,3/4,4/5,5/6,6/7,7/8} \foreach \j/\o in {1/2,2/3} { \draw[->] (G-\i-\j) -- (G-\n-\o); \draw[->] (G-\n-\j) -- (G-\i-\o); } \end{tikzpicture} With the \usetikzlibrary command in the preamble you can enable a wide variety of additional features for drawing special shapes, like this box which is slightly bent. \usetikzlibrary{% decorations.pathmorphing} \begin{tikzpicture}[ decoration={bent,aspect=.3}] \draw [decorate,fill=lightgray] (0,0) rectangle (5.5,4); \node[circle,draw] (A) at (.5,.5) {A}; \node[circle,draw] (B) at (5,3.5) {B}; \draw[->,decorate] (A) -- (B); \draw[->,decorate] (B) -- (A); \end{tikzpicture} B A 118 Producing Mathematical Graphics \usetikzlibrary{positioning} \begin{tikzpicture}[xscale=6, yscale=8,>=stealth] \tikzstyle{v}=[circle, minimum size=1mm,draw,thick] \node[v] (a) {1}; \node[v] (b) [right=of a] {2}; \node[v] (c) [below=of a] {2}; \node[v] (d) [below=of b] {1}; \draw[thick,->] (a) to node {} (c); \draw[thick,->] (a) to node {} (d); \draw[thick,->] (b) to node {} (d); \end{tikzpicture} 1 2 2 1 You can even draw syntax diagrams that look as if they came straight from a book on Pascal programming. The code is a bit more daunting than the example above, so I will just show you the result. If you have a look at the pgf documentation you will find a detailed tutorial on drawing this exact diagram. + unsigned integer . digit unsigned integer E - And there is more, if you have to draw plots of numerical data or functions, you should have a closer look at the pgfplot package. It provides everything you need to draw plots. It can even call the external gnuplot command to evaluate actual functions you wrote into the graph. For more inspiration make sure to visit Kjell Magne Fauske’s excellent http://www.texample.net/tikz/. it contains an ever expanding store of beautiful graphs and other LATEX code. On TEXample.net you will also find a list of tools to work with PGF/TikZ so that you do not have to write all that code by hand. Chapter 6 Customising LATEX Documents produced with the commands you have learned up to this point will look acceptable to a large audience. While they are not fancy-looking, they obey all the established rules of good typesetting, which will make them easy to read and pleasant to look at. However, there are situations where LATEX does not provide a command or environment that matches your needs, or the output produced by some existing command may not meet your requirements. In this chapter, I will try to give some hints on how to teach LATEX new tricks and how to make it produce output that looks different from what is provided by default. 6.1 New Commands, Environments and Packages You may have noticed that all the commands I introduce in this book are typeset in a box, and that they show up in the index at the end of the book. Instead of directly using the necessary LATEX commands to achieve this, I have created a package in which I defined new commands and environments for this purpose. Now I can simply write: \begin{lscommand} \ci{dum} \end{lscommand} \dum In this example, I am using both a new environment called lscommand, which is responsible for drawing the box around the command, and a new command named \ci, which typesets the command name$$and$$makes a corresponding entry in the index. Check this out by looking up the \dum command in the index at the back of this book, where you’ll find an entry for \dum, pointing to every page where I mentioned the \dum command. 120 Customising LATEX If I ever decide that I do not like having the commands typeset in a box any more, I can simply change the definition of the lscommand environment to create a new look. This is much easier than going through the whole document to hunt down all the places where I have used some generic LATEX commands to draw a box around some word. 6.1.1 New Commands To add your own commands, use the \newcommand{name}[num]{definition} command. Basically, the command requires two arguments: the name of the command you want to create, and the definition of the command. The num argument in square brackets is optional and specifies the number of arguments the new command takes (up to 9 are possible). If missing it defaults to 0, i.e. no argument allowed. The following two examples should help you to get the idea. The first example defines a new command called \tnss. This is short for “The Not So Short Introduction to LATEX 2ε .” Such a command could come in handy if you had to write the title of this book over and over again. \newcommand{\tnss}{The not so Short Introduction to \LaTeXe} This is ‘‘\tnss’’ \ldots{} ‘‘\tnss’’ This is “The not so Short Introduction to LATEX 2ε ” . . . “The not so Short Introduction to LATEX 2ε ” The next example illustrates how to define a new command that takes one argument. The #1 tag gets replaced by the argument you specify. If you wanted to use more than one argument, use #2 and so on. \newcommand{\txsit}[2] {This is the \emph{#1} #2 Introduction to \LaTeXe} % in the document body: \begin{itemize} \item \txsit{not so}{short} \item \txsit{very}{long} \end{itemize} • This is the not so short Introduction to LATEX 2ε • This is the very long Introduction to LATEX 2ε LATEX will not allow you to create a new command that would overwrite an existing one. But there is a special command in case you explicitly want this: \renewcommand. It uses the same syntax as the \newcommand command. 6.1 New Commands, Environments and Packages In certain cases you might also want to use the \providecommand command. It works like \newcommand, but if the command is already defined, LATEX 2ε will silently ignore it. There are some points to note about whitespace following LATEX commands. See page 5 for more information. 6.1.2 New Environments Just as with the \newcommand command, there is a command to create your own environments. The \newenvironment command uses the following syntax: \newenvironment{name}[num]{before}{after} Again \newenvironment can have an optional argument. The material specified in the before argument is processed before the text in the environment gets processed. The material in the after argument gets processed when the \end{name} command is encountered. The example below illustrates the usage of the \newenvironment command. \newenvironment{king} {\rule{1ex}{1ex}% \hspace{\stretch{1}}} {\hspace{\stretch{1}}% \rule{1ex}{1ex}} My humble subjects . . . \begin{king} My humble subjects \ldots \end{king} The num argument is used the same way as in the \newcommand command. EX makes sure that you do not define an environment that already exists. If you ever want to change an existing command, use the \renewenvironment command. It uses the same syntax as the \newenvironment command. The commands used in this example will be explained later. For the \rule command see page 135, for \stretch go to page 129, and more information on \hspace can be found on page 129. LAT 6.1.3 Extra Space When creating a new environment you may easily get bitten by extra spaces creeping in, which can potentially have fatal effects, for example when you want to create a title environment which supresses its own indentation as well as the one on the following paragraph. The \ignorespaces command in the begin block of the environment will make it ignore any space after executing 121 122 Customising LATEX the begin block. The end block is a bit more tricky as special processing occurs at the end of an environment. With the \ignorespacesafterend LATEX will issue an \ignorespaces after the special ‘end’ processing has occurred. \newenvironment{simple}% {\noindent}% {\par\noindent} \begin{simple} See the space\\to the left. \end{simple} Same\\here. \newenvironment{correct}% {\noindent\ignorespaces}% {\par\noindent% \ignorespacesafterend} \begin{correct} No space\\to the left. \end{correct} Same\\here. 6.1.4 See the space to the left. Same here. No space to the left. Same here. Commandline LATEX If you work on a Unix-like OS, you might be using Makefiles to build your LATEX projects. In that connection it might be interesting to produce different versions of the same document by calling LATEX with commandline parameters. If you add the following structure to your document: \usepackage{ifthen} \ifthenelse{\equal{\blackandwhite}{true}}{ % "black and white" mode; do something.. }{ % "color" mode; do something different.. } Now call LATEX like this: latex ’\newcommand{\blackandwhite}{true}\input{test.tex}’ First the command \blackandwhite gets defined and then the actual file is read with input. By setting \blackandwhite to false the color version of the document would be produced. 6.2 Fonts and Sizes 6.1.5 123 Your Own Package If you define a lot of new environments and commands, the preamble of your document will get quite long. In this situation, it is a good idea to create a LATEX package containing all your command and environment definitions. Use the \usepackage command to make the package available in your document. % Demo Package by Tobias Oetiker \ProvidesPackage{demopack} \newcommand{\tnss}{The not so Short Introduction to \LaTeXe} \newcommand{\txsit}[1]{The \emph{#1} Short Introduction to \LaTeXe} \newenvironment{king}{\begin{quote}}{\end{quote}} Figure 6.1: Example Package. Writing a package basically consists of copying the contents of your document preamble into a separate file with a name ending in .sty. There is one special command, \ProvidesPackage{package name} for use at the very beginning of your package file. \ProvidesPackage tells LATEX the name of the package and will allow it to issue a sensible error message when you try to include a package twice. Figure 6.1 shows a small example package that contains the commands defined in the examples above. 6.2 6.2.1 Fonts and Sizes Font Changing Commands LATEX chooses the appropriate font and font size based on the logical structure of the document (sections, footnotes, . . . ). In some cases, one might like to change fonts and sizes by hand. To do this, use the commands listed in Tables 6.1 and 6.2. The actual size of each font is a design issue and depends on the document class and its options. Table 6.3 shows the absolute point size for these commands as implemented in the standard document classes. {\small The small$$and$$\textbf{bold} Romans ruled} {\Large all of great big \textit{Italy}.} The small and bold Romans ruled all great big Italy. of 124 Customising LATEX One important feature of LATEX 2ε is that the font attributes are independent. This means that issuing size or even font changing commands,$$and$$still keep bold or slant attributes set earlier. In math mode use the font changing commands to temporarily exit math mode and enter some normal text. If you want to switch to another font for math typesetting you need another special set of commands; refer to Table 6.4. In connection with the font size commands, curly braces play a significant role. They are used to build groups. Groups limit the scope of most LATEX commands. He likes {\LARGE large$$and$${\small small} letters}. He likes large$$and$$small letters. The font size commands also change the line spacing, but only if the paragraph ends within the scope of the font size command. The closing curly brace } should therefore not come too early. Note the position of the \par command in the next two examples. 1 1 \par is equivalent to a blank line Table 6.1: Fonts. \textrm{...} \texttt{...} roman typewriter \textsf{...} sans serif \textmd{...} medium \textbf{...} bold face \textup{...} \textsl{...} upright slanted \textit{...} \textsc{...} italic Small Caps \emph{...} emphasized \textnormal{...} document font Table 6.2: Font Sizes. \tiny \scriptsize \footnotesize \small \normalsize \large tiny font very small font quite small font \Large \LARGE small font \huge large font \Huge normal font larger font very large font huge largest 6.2 Fonts and Sizes 125 Table 6.3: Absolute Point Sizes in Standard Classes. size \tiny \scriptsize \footnotesize \small \normalsize \large \Large \LARGE \huge \Huge 10pt (default) 5pt 7pt 8pt 9pt 10pt 12pt 14pt 17pt 20pt 25pt 11pt option 6pt 8pt 9pt 10pt 11pt 12pt 14pt 17pt 20pt 25pt 12pt option 6pt 8pt 10pt 11pt 12pt 14pt 17pt 20pt 25pt 25pt Table 6.4: Math Fonts. \mathrm{...} \mathbf{...} \mathsf{...} \mathtt{...} \mathit{...} \mathcal{...} \mathnormal{...} Roman Font Boldface Font Sans Serif Font Typewriter Font Italic Font CALLIGRAPHIC FONT N ormal F ont 126 Customising LATEX {\Large Don’t read this! It is not true. You can believe me!\par} Don’t read this! It is not true. You can believe me! {\Large This is not true either. But remember I am a liar.}\par This is not true either. But remember I am a liar. If you want to activate a size changing command for a whole paragraph of text or even more, you might want to use the environment syntax for font changing commands. \begin{Large} This is not true. But then again, what is these days \ldots \end{Large} This is not true. But then again, what is these days . . . This will save you from counting lots of curly braces. 6.2.2 Danger, Will Robinson, Danger As noted at the beginning of this chapter, it is dangerous to clutter your document with explicit commands like this, because they work in opposition to the basic idea of LATEX, which is to separate the logical and visual markup of your document. This means that if you use the same font changing command in several places in order to typeset a special kind of information, you should use \newcommand to define a “logical wrapper command” for the font changing command. \newcommand{\oops}[1]{% \textbf{#1}} Do not \oops{enter} this room, it’s occupied by \oops{machines} of unknown origin and purpose. Do not enter this room, it’s occupied by machines of unknown origin and purpose. This approach has the advantage that you can decide at some later stage that you want to use a visual representation of danger other than \textbf, without having to wade through your document, identifying all the occurrences of \textbf and then figuring out for each one whether it was used for pointing out danger or for some other reason. Please note the difference between telling LATEX to emphasize something and telling it to use a different font. The \emph command is context aware, while the font commands are absolute. 6.3 Spacing 127 \textit{You can also \emph{emphasize} text if it is set in italics,} \textsf{in a \emph{sans-serif} font,} \texttt{or in \emph{typewriter} style.} 6.2.3 You can also emphasize text if it is set in italics, in a sans-serif font, or in typewriter style. Advice To conclude this journey into the land of fonts and font sizes, here is a little word of advice: ! you Remember The MO RE fonts use in a document, the more readable and beautiful it become . 6.3 6.3.1 s Spacing Line Spacing If you want to use larger inter-line spacing in a document, change its value by putting the \linespread{factor} command into the preamble of your document. Use \linespread{1.3} for “one and a half” line spacing, and \linespread{1.6} for “double” line spacing. Normally the lines are not spread, so the default line spread factor is 1. Note that the effect of the \linespread command is rather drastic$$and$$not appropriate for published work. So if you have a good reason for changing 128 Customising LATEX the line spacing you might want to use the command: \setlength{\baselineskip}{1.5\baselineskip} {\setlength{\baselineskip}% {1.5\baselineskip} This paragraph is typeset with the baseline skip set to 1.5 of what it was before. Note the par command at the end of the paragraph.\par} This paragraph has a clear purpose, it shows that after the curly brace has been closed, everything is back to normal. 6.3.2 This paragraph is typeset with the baseline skip set to 1.5 of what it was before. Note the par command at the end of the paragraph. This paragraph has a clear purpose, it shows that after the curly brace has been closed, everything is back to normal. Paragraph Formatting In LATEX, there are two parameters influencing paragraph layout. By placing a definition like \setlength{\parindent}{0pt} \setlength{\parskip}{1ex plus 0.5ex minus 0.2ex} in the preamble of the input file, you can change the layout of paragraphs. These two commands increase the space between two paragraphs while setting the paragraph indent to zero. The plus and minus parts of the length above tell TEX that it can compress and expand the inter-paragraph skip by the amount specified, if this is necessary to properly fit the paragraphs onto the page. In continental Europe, paragraphs are often separated by some space$$and$$not indented. But beware, this also has its effect on the table of contents. Its lines get spaced more loosely now as well. To avoid this, you might want to move the two commands from the preamble into your document to some place below the command \tableofcontents or to not use them at all, because you’ll find that most professional books use indenting and not spacing to separate paragraphs. 6.3 Spacing 129 If you want to indent a paragraph that is not indented, use \indent at the beginning of the paragraph.2 Obviously, this will only have an effect when \parindent is not set to zero. To create a non-indented paragraph, use \noindent as the first command of the paragraph. This might come in handy when you start a document with body text and not with a sectioning command. 6.3.3 Horizontal Space LATEX determines the spaces between words and sentences automatically. To add horizontal space, use: \hspace{length} If such a space should be kept even if it falls at the end or the start of a line, use \hspace* instead of \hspace. The length in the simplest case is just a number plus a unit. The most important units are listed in Table 6.5. This\hspace{1.5cm}is a space of 1.5 cm. This is a space of 1.5 cm. The command \stretch{n} generates a special rubber space. It stretches until all the remaining space on a line is filled up. If multiple \hspace{\stretch{n}} commands are issued on the same line, they occupy all available space in proportion of their respective stretch factors. x\hspace{\stretch{1}} x\hspace{\stretch{3}}x x x When using horizontal space together with text, it may make sense to make the space adjust its size relative to the size of the current font. This can be done by using the text-relative units em and ex: 2 To indent the first paragraph after each section head, use the indentfirst package in the ‘tools’ bundle. x Table 6.5: TEX Units. mm cm in pt em ex millimetre ≈ 1/25 inch centimetre = 10 mm inch = 25.4 mm point ≈ 1/72 inch ≈ 13 mm approx width of an ‘M’ in the current font approx height of an ‘x’ in the current font {\Large{}big\hspace{1em}y}\\ {\tiny{}tin\hspace{1em}y} 6.3.4 big y tin y Vertical Space The space between paragraphs, sections, subsections, . . . is determined automatically by LATEX. If necessary, additional vertical space between two paragraphs can be added with the command: \vspace{length} This command should normally be used between two empty lines. If the space should be preserved at the top or at the bottom of a page, use the starred version of the command, \vspace*, instead of \vspace. The \stretch command, in connection with \pagebreak, can be used to typeset text on the last line of a page, or to centre text vertically on a page. Some text \ldots \vspace{\stretch{1}} This goes onto the last line of the page.\pagebreak Additional space between two lines of the same paragraph or within a table is specified with the \\[length] command. With \bigskip and \smallskip you can skip a predefined amount of vertical space without having to worry about exact numbers. 6.4 Page Layout 6.4 Page Layout LATEX 2ε allows you to specify the paper size in the \documentclass command. It then automatically picks the right text margins, but sometimes you may not be happy with the predefined values. Naturally, you can change them. Figure 6.2 shows all the parameters that can be changed. The figure was produced with the layout package from the tools bundle.3 WAIT! . . . before you launch into a “Let’s make that narrow page a bit wider” frenzy, take a few seconds to think. As with most things in LATEX, there is a good reason for the page layout to be as it is. Sure, compared to your off-the-shelf MS Word page, it looks awfully narrow. But take a look at your favourite book4 and count the number of characters on a standard text line. You will find that there are no more than about 66 characters on each line. Now do the same on your LATEX page. You will find that there are also about 66 characters per line. Experience shows that the reading gets difficult as soon as there are more characters on a single line. This is because it is difficult for the eyes to move from the end of one line to the start of the next one. This is also why newspapers are typeset in multiple columns. So if you increase the width of your body text, keep in mind that you are making life difficult for the readers of your paper. But enough of the cautioning, I promised to tell you how you do it . . . LATEX provides two commands to change these parameters. They are usually used in the document preamble. The first command assigns a fixed value to any of the parameters: \setlength{parameter}{length} The second command adds a length to any of the parameters: \addtolength{parameter}{length} This second command is actually more useful than the \setlength command, because it works relative to the existing settings. To add one centimetre to the overall text width, I put the following commands into the document preamble: \addtolength{\hoffset}{-0.5cm} \addtolength{\textwidth}{1cm} In this context, you might want to look at the calc package. It allows you to use arithmetic operations in the argument of \setlength and other places where numeric values are entered into function arguments. 3 4 pkg/tools I mean a real printed book produced by a reputable publisher. 131 132 Customising LATEX i 4 ? 6 i 5 ? 6 Margin Notes i - 3 1 3 5 7 9 11 6 i 2 ? ?Header 6 6 Body i 7 - 9i i 10 1i- i 6 i - 8 ? 6 i 11 one inch + \hoffset \oddsidemargin = 22pt or \evensidemargin \headheight = 12pt \textheight = 595pt \marginparsep = 7pt \footskip = 27pt \hoffset = 0pt \paperwidth = 597pt ? Footer 2 4 6 8 10 one inch + \voffset \topmargin = 22pt \headsep = 19pt \textwidth = 360pt \marginparwidth = 106pt \marginparpush = 5pt (not shown) \voffset = 0pt \paperheight = 845pt Figure 6.2: Layout parameters for this book. Try the layouts package to print the layout of your own document. 6.5 More Fun With Lengths 6.5 133 More Fun With Lengths Whenever possible, I avoid using absolute lengths in LATEX documents. I rather try to base things on the width or height of other page elements. For the width of a figure this could be \textwidth in order to make it fill the page. The following 3 commands allow you to determine the width, height$$and$$depth of a text string. \settoheight{variable}{text} \settodepth{variable}{text} \settowidth{variable}{text} The example below shows a possible application of these commands. \flushleft \newenvironment{vardesc}[1]{% \settowidth{\parindent}{#1:\ } \makebox[0pt][r]{#1:\ }}{} \begin{displaymath} a^2+b^2=c^2 \end{displaymath} \begin{vardesc}{Where}a, b -- are adjacent to the right angle of a right-angled triangle. c -- is the hypotenuse of the triangle and feels lonely. a2 + b2 = c2 Where: a, b – are adjacent to the right angle of a right-angled triangle. c – is the hypotenuse of the triangle and feels lonely. d – finally does not show up here at all. Isn’t that puzzling? d -- finally does not show up here at all. Isn’t that puzzling? \end{vardesc} 6.6 Boxes LATEX builds up its pages by pushing around boxes. At first, each letter is a little box, which is then glued to other letters to form words. These are again glued to other words, but with special glue, which is elastic so that a series of words can be squeezed or stretched as to exactly fill a line on the page. I admit, this is a very simplistic version of what really happens, but the point is that TEX operates on glue and boxes. Letters are not the only things that can be boxes. You can put virtually everything into a box, including 134 Customising LATEX other boxes. Each box will then be handled by LATEX as if it were a single letter. In earlier chapters you encountered some boxes, although I did not tell you. The tabular environment and the \includegraphics, for example, both produce a box. This means that you can easily arrange two tables or images side by side. You just have to make sure that their combined width is not larger than the textwidth. You can also pack a paragraph of your choice into a box with either the \parbox[pos]{width}{text} command or the \begin{minipage}[pos]{width} text \end{minipage} environment. The pos parameter can take one of the letters c, t or b to control the vertical alignment of the box, relative to the baseline of the surrounding text. width takes a length argument specifying the width of the box. The main difference between a minipage and a \parbox is that you cannot use all commands and environments inside a parbox, while almost anything is possible in a minipage. While \parbox packs up a whole paragraph doing line breaking$$and$$everything, there is also a class of boxing commands that operates only on horizontally aligned material. We already know one of them; it’s called \mbox. It simply packs up a series of boxes into another one, and can be used to prevent LATEX from breaking two words. As boxes can be put inside boxes, these horizontal box packers give you ultimate flexibility. \makebox[width][pos]{text} width defines the width of the resulting box as seen from the outside.5 Besides the length expressions, you can also use \width, \height, \depth, and \totalheight in the width parameter. They are set from values obtained by measuring the typeset text. The pos parameter takes a one letter value: center, flushleft, flushright, or spread the text to fill the box. The command \framebox works exactly the same as \makebox, but it draws a box around the text. The following example shows you some things you could do with the \makebox and \framebox commands. 5 This means it can be smaller than the material inside the box. You can even set the width to 0pt so that the text inside the box will be typeset without influencing the surrounding boxes. 6.7 Rules 135 \makebox[\textwidth]{% c e n t r a l}\par central \makebox[\textwidth][s]{% s p r e a d}\par s p r e \framebox[1.1\width]{Guess I’m Guess I’m framed now! framed now!} \par \framebox[0.8\width][r]{Bummer, Bummer, I am too wide I am too wide} \par \framebox[1cm][l]{never never mind, Can you so am readI this? mind, so am I} Can you read this? a d Now that we control the horizontal, the obvious next step is to go for the vertical.6 No problem for LATEX. The \raisebox{lift}[extend-above-baseline][extend-below-baseline]{text} command lets you define the vertical properties of a box. You can use \width, \height, \depth, and \totalheight in the first three parameters, in order to act upon the size of the box inside the text argument. \raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\Large% \textbf{Aaaa\raisebox{-0.3ex}{a}% \raisebox{-0.7ex}{aa}% \raisebox{-1.2ex}{r}% \raisebox{-2.2ex}{g}% \raisebox{-4.5ex}{h}}} she shouted, but not even the next one in line noticed that something terrible had happened to her. 6.7 Aaaaaaa she shouted, but not rg in line noticed that someeven the next one thing terrible hadhhappened to her. Rules A few pages back you may have noticed the command \rule[lift]{width}{height} In normal use it produces a simple black box. \rule{3mm}{.1pt}% \rule[-1mm]{5mm}{1cm}% \rule{3mm}{.1pt}% \rule[1mm]{1cm}{5mm}% \rule{3mm}{.1pt} 6 ... Total control is only to be obtained by controlling both the horizontal and the vertical 136 Customising LATEX This is useful for drawing vertical and horizontal lines. The line on the title page, for example, has been created with a \rule command. The End. Appendix A Installing LATEX Knuth published the source to TEX back in a time when nobody knew about OpenSource and/or Free Software. The License that comes with TEX lets you do whatever you want with the source, but you can only call the result of your work TEX if the program passes a set of tests Knuth has also provided. This has lead to a situation where we have free TEX implementations for almost every Operating System under the sun. This chapter will give some hints on what to install on Linux, Mac OS X and Windows, to get a working TEX setup. A.1 What to Install To use LATEX on any computer system, you need several programs. 1. The TEX/LATEX program for processing your LATEX source files into typeset PDF or DVI documents. 2. A text editor for editing your LATEX source files. Some products even let you start the LATEX program from within the editor. 3. A PDF/DVI viewer program for previewing and printing your documents. 4. A program to handle PostScript files and images for inclusion into your documents. For every platforms there are several programs that fit the requirements above. Here we just tell about the ones we know, like and have some experience with. A.2 Cross Platform Editor While TEX is available on many different computing platforms, LATEX editors have long been highly platform specific. 138 Installing LATEX Over the past few years I have come to like Texmaker quite a lot. Apart from being very a useful editor with integrated pdf-preview and syntax highlighting, it has the advantage of running on Windows, Mac and Unix/Linux equally well. See http://www.xm1math.net/texmaker for further information. There is also a forked version of Texmaker called TeXstudio on http://texstudio.sourceforge.net/. It also seems well maintained$$and$$is also available for all three major platforms. You will find some platform specific editor suggestions in the OS sections below. A.3 A.3.1 TEX on Mac OS X TEX Distribution Just download MacTeX. It is a pre-compiled LATEX distribution for OS X. MacTeX provides a full LATEX installation plus a number of additional tools. Get MacTEX from http://www.tug.org/mactex/. A.3.2 OSX TEX Editor If you are not happy with our cross-platform suggestion Texmaker (section A.2). The most popular open source editor for LATEX on the mac seems to be TEXshop. Get a copy from http://www.uoregon.edu/~koch/texshop. It is also contained in the MacTeX distribution. Recent TEXLive distributions contain the TEXworks editor http:// texworks.org/ which is a multi-platform editor based on the TEXShop design. Since TEXworks uses the Qt toolkit, it is available on any platform supported by this toolkit (MacOS X, Windows, Linux.) A.3.3 Treat yourself to PDFView Use PDFView for viewing PDF files generated by LATEX, it integrates tightly with your LATEX text editor. PDFView is an open-source application, available from the PDFView website on http://pdfview.sourceforge.net/. After installing, open PDFViews preferences dialog and make sure that the automatically reload documents option is enabled and that PDFSync support is set appropriately. A.4 A.4.1 TEX on Windows Getting TEX First, get a copy of the excellent MiKTEX distribution from http://www.miktex.org/. It contains all the basic programs and files A.5 TEX on Linux required to compile LATEX documents. The coolest feature in my eyes, is that MiKTEX will download missing LATEX packages on the fly and install them magically while compiling a document. Alternatively you can also use the TeXlive distribution which exists for Windows, Unix and Mac OS to get your base setup going http://www.tug.org/texlive/. A.4.2 A LATEX editor If you are not happy with our crossplatform suggestion Texmaker (section A.2). TeXnicCenter uses many concepts from the programming-world to provide a nice and efficient LATEX writing environment in Windows. Get your copy from http://www.texniccenter.org/. TeXnicCenter integrates nicely with MiKTeX. Recent TEXLive distributions contain the TEXworks Editor http:// texworks.org/. It supports Unicode and requires at least Windows XP. A.4.3 Document Preview You will most likely be using Yap for DVI preview as it gets installed with MikTeX. For PDF you may want to look at Sumatra PDF http: //blog.kowalczyk.info/software/sumatrapdf/. I mention Sumatra PDF because it lets you jump from any position in the pdf document back into corresponding position in your source document. A.4.4 Working with graphics Working with high quality graphics in LATEX means that you have to use Encapsulated PostScript (eps) or PDF as your picture format. The program that helps you deal with this is called GhostScript. You can get it, together with its own front-end GhostView, from http://www.cs.wisc. edu/~ghost/. If you deal with bitmap graphics (photos and scanned material), you may want to have a look at the open source Photoshop alternative Gimp, available from http://gimp-win.sourceforge.net/. A.5 TEX on Linux If you work with Linux, chances are high that LATEX is already installed on your system, or at least available on the installation source you used to setup. Use your package manager to install the following packages: • texlive – the base TEX/LATEX setup. 139 140 Installing LATEX • emacs (with AUCTeX) – an editor that integrates tightly with LATEX through the add-on AUCTeX package. • ghostscript – a PostScript preview program. • xpdf and acrobat – a PDF preview program. • imagemagick – a free program for converting bitmap images. • gimp – a free Photoshop look-a-like. • inkscape – a free illustrator/corel draw look-a-like. If you are looking for a more windows like graphical editing environment, check out Texmaker. See section A.2. Most Linux distros insist on splitting up their TEX environments into a large number of optional packages, so if something is missing after your first install, go check again. Bibliography [1] Leslie Lamport. LATEX: A Document Preparation System. AddisonWesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994, ISBN 0-20152983-1. [2] Donald E. Knuth. The TEXbook, Volume A of Computers and Typesetting, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1984, ISBN 0-201-13448-9. [3] Frank Mittelbach, Michel Goossens, Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, Chris Rowley. The LATEX Companion, (2nd Edition). Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 2004, ISBN 0-201-36299-6. [4] Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach. The LATEX Graphics Companion. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1997, ISBN 0-201-85469-4. [5] Each LATEX installation should provide a so-called LATEX Local Guide, which explains the things that are special to the local system. It should be contained in a file called local.tex. Unfortunately, some lazy sysops do not provide such a document. In this case, go and ask your local LATEX guru for help. [6] LATEX3 Project Team. LATEX 2ε for authors. Comes with the LATEX 2ε distribution as usrguide.tex. [7] LATEX3 Project Team. LATEX 2ε for Class and Package writers. Comes with the LATEX 2ε distribution as clsguide.tex. [8] LATEX3 Project Team. LATEX 2ε Font selection. Comes with the LATEX 2ε distribution as fntguide.tex. [9] D. P. Carlisle. Packages in the ‘graphics’ bundle. Comes with the ‘graphics’ bundle as grfguide.tex, available from the same source your LATEX distribution came from. [10] Rainer Schöpf, Bernd Raichle, Chris Rowley. A New Implementation of LATEX’s verbatim Environments. Comes with the ‘tools’ bundle as 142 BIBLIOGRAPHY verbatim.dtx, available from the same source your LATEX distribution came from. [11] Vladimir Volovich, Werner Lemberg and LATEX3 Project Team. Cyrillic languages support in LATEX. Comes with the LATEX 2ε distribution as cyrguide.tex. [12] Graham Williams. The TeX Catalogue is a very complete listing of many TEX and LATEX related packages. Available online from CTAN: //help/Catalogue/catalogue.html [13] Keith Reckdahl. Using EPS Graphics in LATEX 2ε Documents, which explains everything and much more than you ever wanted to know about EPS files and their use in LATEX documents. Available online from CTAN://info/epslatex.ps [14] Kristoffer H. Rose. XY-pic User’s Guide. Downloadable from CTAN with XY-pic distribution [15] John D. Hobby. A User’s Manual for METAPOST. Downloadable from http://cm.bell-labs.com/who/hobby/ [16] Alan Hoenig. TEX Unbound. Oxford University Press, 1998, ISBN 0-19-509685-1; 0-19-509686-X (pbk.) [17] Urs Oswald. Graphics in LATEX 2ε , containing some Java source files for generating arbitrary circles and ellipses within the picture environment, and METAPOST - A Tutorial. Both downloadable from http://www. ursoswald.ch [18] Till Tantau. TikZ&PGF Manual. Download from CTAN://graphics/ pgf/base/doc/generic/pgf/pgfmanual.pdf [19] François Charette. Polyglossia: A Babel Replacement for X LATEX. Comes with the TEXLive distribution as polyglossia.pdf. (Type texdoc polyglossia on the command line.) E [20] François Charette. An ArabTEX-like interface for typesetting languages in Arabic script with X LATEX. Comes with the TEXLive distribution as arabxetex.pdf. (Type texdoc arabxetex on the command line.) E [21] Will Robertson and Khaled Hosny. The fontspec package. Comes with the TEXLive distribution as fontspec.pdf. (Type texdoc fontspec on the command line.) [22] Apostolos Syropoulos. The xgreek package. Comes with the TEXLive distribution as xgreek.pdf. (Type texdoc xgreek on the command line.) BIBLIOGRAPHY [23] Vafa Khalighi. The bidi package. Comes with the TEXLive distribution as bidi.pdf. (Type texdoc bidi on the command line. [24] Vafa Khalighi. The XePersian package. Comes with the TEXLive distribution as xepersian-doc.pdf. (Type texdoc xepersian on the command line. [25] Wenchang Sun. The xeCJK package. Comes with the TEXLive distribution as xeCJK.pdf. (Type texdoc xecjk on the command line. 143 Index Symbols \!, 69 ", 21 "’, 33 "-, 33 "---, 33 "<, 33 "=, 33 ">, 33 "‘, 33 , 53 \,, 55, 69 -, 22 −, 22 \-, 20 –, 22 —, 22 ., space after, 38 . . . , 24 \:, 69 \;, 69 \@, 38 \[, 54, 55 \\, 19, 43, 44, 46, 130 \\*, 19, 54
~, 38
A
A4 paper, 11
A5 paper, 11
å, 25
abstract, 44
accent, 24
acute, 25
æ, 25
align, 62
\Alph, 32, 33
\alph, 32, 33
\Alpha, 75
American Mathematical Society, 53
amsbsy, 71
amsfonts, 70, 79
amsmath, 53, 59, 60, 68, 69, 71
amssymb, 56, 70, 75
amsthm, 71, 72
\and, 40
ansinew, 26
apostrophe, 58
\appendix, 39, 40
applemac, 26
Arabic, 37
arabxetex, 37
\arccos, 58
\arcsin, 58
\arctan, 58
\arg, 58
array, 67, 68
\arraystretch, 47
arrow symbols, 58
article class, 10
\Asbuk, 32
\asbuk, 32
\author, 40, 96
B
B5 paper, 11
babel, 20, 25, 32–35, 116
\backmatter, 40
INDEX
backslash, 5
\bar, 58
base font size, 11
beamer, 100–102, 105
\begin, 42, 106, 114
\Beta, 75
\bibitem, 85
bibliography, 85
bicig, 33
bidi, 36, 37
\Big, 60
\big, 60
\Bigg, 60
\bigg, 60
\bigskip, 130
binary relations, 59
\binom, 59
binomial coefficient, 59
blackboard bold, 56
block, 102
bm, 71
Bmatrix, 68
bmatrix, 68
\bmod, 58
bold face, 124
bold symbols, 56, 71
\boldmath, 71
\boldsymbol, 71
book class, 10
booktabs, 48
brace
horizontal, 57
bracketing, 60
brazilian, 27
C
calc, 131
\caption, 50, 51
cases, 68
\cdot, 57
\cdots, 57
center, 43
\chapter, 39
\chaptermark, 89
145
Chinese, 38
\ci, 119
\circle, 109
\circle*, 109
\cite, 85
\cleardoublepage, 51
\clearpage, 51
\cline, 46
color, 100
coloured text, 10
comma, 23
commands, 5
\!, 69
\,, 55, 69
\-, 20
\:, 69
\;, 69
\@, 38
$, 54, 55 \\, 19, 43, 44, 46, 130 \\*, 19$, 54
\Alph, 32, 33
\alph, 32, 33
\Alpha, 75
\and, 40
\appendix, 39, 40
\arccos, 58
\arcsin, 58
\arctan, 58
\arg, 58
\arraystretch, 47
\Asbuk, 32
\asbuk, 32
\author, 40, 96
\backmatter, 40
\bar, 58
\begin, 42, 106, 114
\Beta, 75
\bibitem, 85
\Big, 60
\big, 60
\Bigg, 60
146
INDEX
\bigg, 60
\bigskip, 130
\binom, 59
\bmod, 58
\boldmath, 71
\boldsymbol, 71
\caption, 50, 51
\cdot, 57
\cdots, 57
\chapter, 39
\chaptermark, 89
\ci, 119
\circle, 109
\circle*, 109
\cite, 85
\cleardoublepage, 51
\clearpage, 51
\cline, 46
\cos, 58
\cosh, 58
\cot, 58
\coth, 58
\csc, 58
\date, 40
\ddots, 57
\DeclareMathOperator, 58
\deg, 58
\depth, 134, 135
\det, 58
\dfrac, 59
\dim, 58
\displaystyle, 70
\documentclass, 9, 14, 20
\dq, 29
\dum, 119
\emph, 42, 124, 126
\end, 42, 106
\enumBul, 32
\enumEng, 32
\enumLat, 32
\eqref, 54
\exp, 58
\fbox, 21
\flq, 29
\flqq, 29
\foldera, 113
\folderb, 113
\footnote, 41, 51
\footskip, 132
\frac, 59
\framebox, 134
\frenchspacing, 32, 38
\frontmatter, 40
\frq, 29
\frqq, 29
\fussy, 20
\gcd, 58
\hat, 58
\height, 134, 135
\hline, 46
\hom, 58
\href, 95, 96, 98
\hspace, 121, 129
\hyphenation, 20
\idotsint, 69
\IEEEeqnarraymulticol, 65
\IEEEmulticol, 67
\IEEEnonumber, 66
\IEEEyesnumber, 67
\IEEEyessubnumber, 67
\ifpdf, 97
\ignorespaces, 121, 122
\ignorespacesafterend, 122
\iiiint, 69
\iiint, 69
\iint, 69
\include, 14, 15
\includegraphics, 84, 93, 97,
134
\includeonly, 15
\indent, 129
\index, 86, 87
\inf, 58
\input, 15
\int, 60
\item, 42
INDEX
\ker, 58
\label, 41, 50, 54
\LaTeX, 21
\LaTeXe, 21
\ldots, 24, 57
\left, 60
\lefteqn, 63, 65
\leftmark, 87, 89
\lg, 58
\lim, 58
\liminf, 58
\limsup, 58
\line, 108, 113
\linebreak, 19
\linethickness, 110, 111, 113
\listoffigures, 50
\listoftables, 50
\ln, 58
\log, 58
\mainmatter, 40, 96
\makebox, 134
\makeindex, 86
\maketitle, 40
\marginparpush, 132
\marginparsep, 132
\marginparwidth, 132
\mathbb, 56
\max, 58
\mbox, 21, 24, 134
\min, 58
\multicolumn, 47
\multicolumns, 65
\multiput, 107, 110
\negmedspace, 66
\newcommand, 69, 120, 121
\newenvironment, 121
\newline, 19
\newpage, 19
\newsavebox, 112
\newtheorem, 71
\noindent, 129
\nolinebreak, 19
\nombre, 28
147
\nonumber, 66
\nopagebreak, 19
\not, 76
\oddsidemargin, 132
\oval, 111, 113
\overbrace, 57
\overleftarrow, 58
\overline, 57
\overrightarrow, 58
\pagebreak, 19
\pageref, 41, 90
\pagestyle, 13
\paperheight, 132
\paperwidth, 132
\par, 124
\paragraph, 39
\parbox, 134
\parindent, 128
\parskip, 128
\part, 39
\partial, 59
\phantom, 51, 70
\pmod, 58
\Pr, 58
\printindex, 87
\prod, 60
\protect, 51
\providecommand, 121
\ProvidesPackage, 123
\put, 107–112
\qbezier, 105, 107, 113
\qedhere, 73, 74
\raisebox, 135
\ref, 41, 50, 90
\renewcommand, 120
\renewenvironment, 121
\right, 60, 67
\right., 60
\rightmark, 87, 89
\rule, 48, 121, 135, 136
\savebox, 112
\scriptscriptstyle, 70
148
INDEX
\scriptstyle, 70
\sec, 58
\section, 39, 51
\sectionmark, 89
\selectlanguage, 26
\setlength, 106, 128, 131
\settodepth, 133
\settoheight, 133
\settowidth, 133
\shorthandoff, 116
\sin, 58
\sinh, 58
\slash, 22
\sloppy, 20
\smallskip, 130
\smash, 55
\sqrt, 57
\stackrel, 59
\stretch, 121, 129
\subparagraph, 39
\subsection, 39
\subsectionmark, 89
\substack, 60
\subsubsection, 39
\sum, 60
\sup, 58
\tabcolsep, 47
\tableofcontents, 39
\tag, 54
\tan, 58
\tanh, 58
\TeX, 21
\texorpdfstring, 97
\textbackslash, 5
\textcelsius, 23
\textdegree, 23
\texteuro, 23
\textheight, 132
\textstyle, 70
\textwidth, 132
\tfrac, 59
\theoremstyle, 71
\thicklines, 108, 111, 113
\thinlines, 111, 113
\thispagestyle, 13
\title, 40
\tnss, 120
\today, 21
\topmargin, 132
\totalheight, 134, 135
\ud, 69
\underbrace, 57
\underline, 42, 57
\unitlength, 106, 108
\usebox, 112
\usepackage, 10, 13, 23, 25–27,
33, 123
\usetikzlibrary, 117
\vdots, 57
\vec, 58
\vector, 108
\verb, 45
\verbatiminput, 89
\vspace, 130
\widehat, 58
\widetilde, 58
\width, 134, 135
comment, 6
\cos, 58
\cosh, 58
\cot, 58
\coth, 58
cp1251, 26, 34
cp850, 26
cp866nav, 26
cross-references, 41
\csc, 58
curly braces, 5, 124
Cyrillic, 36
D
dash, 22
\date, 40
dcolumn, 47
\ddots, 57
decimal alignment, 47
\DeclareMathOperator, 58
INDEX
\deg, 58
degree symbol, 22
delimiters, 60
\depth, 134, 135
description, 42
\det, 58
Deutsch, 29
\dfrac, 59
diagonal dots, 57
\dim, 58
dimensions, 129
display style, 53, 55
displaymath, 54
\displaystyle, 70
doc, 12
document font size, 11
document title, 11
\documentclass, 9, 14, 20
dot, 57
dotless ı and , 25
dots, 57
three, 57
double line spacing, 127
double sided, 11
\dq, 29
\dum, 119
T2C, 27
X2, 27
input
ansinew, 26
applemac, 26
cp1251, 26, 34
cp850, 26
cp866nav, 26
koi8-ru, 26, 32
latin1, 26
macukr, 26
mn, 34
utf8, 26, 34
\end, 42, 106
\enumBul, 32
\enumEng, 32
enumerate, 42
\enumLat, 32
environments
Bmatrix, 68
IEEEeqnarray, 61, 62, 64
Vmatrix, 68
abstract, 44
align, 62
array, 67, 68
block, 102
bmatrix, 68
E
cases, 68
eepic, 109
center, 43
ellipsis, 23
comment, 6
em-dash, 22
description, 42
\emph, 42, 124, 126
displaymath, 54
empty, 13
enumerate, 42
en-dash, 22
eqnarray, 63
Encapsulated PostScript, 83, 93,
equation*, 54, 55, 61
139
equation, 54, 55, 61, 63
encodings
figure, 49, 50
font
flushleft, 43
LGR, 27
flushright, 43
OT1, 27
frame, 102
T1, 27, 32
itemize, 42
T2*, 32
lscommand, 119
T2A, 27, 32
matrix, 68
minipage, 134
T2B, 27
149
150
INDEX
multline*, 61
multline, 61, 63
parbox, 134
picture, 105, 106, 109, 110
pmatrix, 68
proof, 72
quotation, 44
quote, 44
table, 49, 50
tabular, 45, 134
thebibliography, 85
tikzpicture, 115
verbatim, 45, 89
verse, 44
vmatrix, 68
eqnarray, 63
\eqref, 54
equation, 53
LATEX, 54
amsmath, 54
multiple, 62
equation, 54, 55, 61, 63
equation*, 54, 55, 61
eurosym, 23
executive paper, 11
\exp, 58
exponent, 56
exscale, 12
extension, 13
.aux, 14
.cls, 14
.dtx, 13
.dvi, 14, 84
.eps, 84
.fd, 14
.idx, 14, 86
.ilg, 14
.ind, 14, 86
.ins, 14
.lof, 14
.log, 14
.lot, 14
.sty, 13, 90
.tex, 8, 13
.toc, 14
F
fancyhdr, 87–89
\fbox, 21
figure, 49, 50
file types, 13
floating bodies, 48
\flq, 29
\flqq, 29
flushleft, 43
flushright, 43
\foldera, 113
\folderb, 113
font, 123
\footnotesize, 124
\Huge, 124
\huge, 124
\LARGE, 124
\Large, 124
\large, 124
\mathbf, 125
\mathcal, 125
\mathit, 125
\mathnormal, 125
\mathrm, 125
\mathsf, 125
\mathtt, 125
\normalsize, 124
\scriptsize, 124
\small, 124
\textbf, 124
\textit, 124
\textmd, 124
\textnormal, 124
\textrm, 124
\textsc, 124
\textsf, 124
\textsl, 124
\texttt, 124
\textup, 124
\tiny, 124
font encoding, 12
font encodings, 27
INDEX
LGR, 27
OT1, 27
T1, 27, 32
T2*, 32
T2A, 27, 32
T2B, 27
T2C, 27
X2, 27
font size, 123, 124
fontenc, 12, 27, 32
fontspec, 35, 99
footer, 13
\footnote, 41, 51
\footnotesize, 124
\footskip, 132
\frac, 59
fraction, 59
fragile commands, 51
frame, 102
\framebox, 134
French, 28
frenchb, 28
\frenchspacing, 32, 38
\frontmatter, 40
\frq, 29
\frqq, 29
\fussy, 20
G
\gcd, 58
geometry, 89
German, 25, 29
GhostScript, 9, 83, 139
GhostView, 139
Gimp, 139
graphics, 10, 83
graphicx, 83, 93, 100
grave, 25
Greek, 31, 36
Greek letters, 56
grouping, 124
H
\hat, 58
151
Hebrew, 37
\height, 134, 135
\hline, 46
\hom, 58
horizontal
brace, 57
dots, 57
line, 57
space, 129
\href, 95, 96, 98
\hspace, 121, 129
\Huge, 124
\huge, 124
hyperref, 36, 91, 93, 94, 97, 98, 100
hypertext, 90
hyphen, 22
hyphenat, 89
\hyphenation, 20
I
\idotsint, 69
IEEEeqnarray, 61, 62, 64
\IEEEeqnarraymulticol, 65
\IEEEmulticol, 67
\IEEEnonumber, 66
IEEEtrantools, 64
\IEEEyesnumber, 67
\IEEEyessubnumber, 67
ifpdf, 97
\ifpdf, 97
ifthen, 12
\ignorespaces, 121, 122
\ignorespacesafterend, 122
\iiiint, 69
\iiint, 69
\iint, 69
\include, 14, 15
\includegraphics, 84, 93, 97, 134
\includeonly, 15
\indent, 129
152
INDEX
indentfirst, 129
index, 86
\index, 86, 87
\inf, 58
\input, 15
input encodings
ansinew, 26
applemac, 26
cp1251, 26, 34
cp850, 26
cp866nav, 26
koi8-ru, 26, 32
latin1, 26
macukr, 26
mn, 34
utf8, 26, 34
input file, 7
inputenc, 12, 26, 32
\int, 60
integral operator, 60
international, 24
italic, 124
\item, 42
itemize, 42
J
Japanese, 38
Jawi, 37
K
kashida, 37
Kashmiri, 37
\ker, 58
Knuth, Donald E., 1
koi8-ru, 26, 32
Korean, 38
kotex, 30
Kurdish, 37
L
\label, 41, 50, 54
Lamport, Leslie, 2
language, 24
\LARGE, 124
\Large, 124
\large, 124
\LaTeX, 21
LATEX3, 4
\LaTeXe, 21
latexsym, 12
latin1, 26
layout, 131
layouts, 132
\ldots, 24, 57
\left, 60
left aligned, 43
\lefteqn, 63, 65
\leftmark, 87, 89
legal paper, 11
letter paper, 11
\lg, 58
LGR, 27
ligature, 24
\lim, 58
\liminf, 58
\limsup, 58
line
horizontal, 57
\line, 108, 113
line break, 19
line spacing, 127
\linebreak, 19
\linethickness, 110, 111, 113
\listoffigures, 50
\listoftables, 50
\ln, 58
\log, 58
long equations, 61
longtable, 47
lscommand, 119
M
MacTeX, 138
macukr, 26
\mainmatter, 40, 96
\makebox, 134
makeidx, 12, 86
makeidx package, 86
INDEX
\makeindex, 86
makeindex program, 86
\maketitle, 40
Malay, 37
\marginparpush, 132
\marginparsep, 132
\marginparwidth, 132
margins, 131
math mode, 55
math spacing, 69
\mathbb, 56
\mathbf, 125
\mathcal, 125
mathematical
accents, 57
delimiter, 60
functions, 58
minus, 22
mathematics, 53
\mathit, 125
\mathnormal, 125
\mathrm, 125
mathrsfs, 79
\mathsf, 125
mathtext, 32
\mathtt, 125
matrix, 68
matrix, 68
\max, 58
\mbox, 21, 24, 134
memoir, 30
METAPOST, 93
mhchem, 70
microtype, 100
MiKTEX, 138
\min, 58
minimal class, 10
minipage, 134
minus sign, 22
Mittelbach, Frank, 2
mn, 34
modulo function, 58
\multicolumn, 47
\multicolumns, 65
153
\multiput, 107, 110
multline, 61, 63
multline*, 61
N
\negmedspace, 66
\newcommand, 69, 120, 121
\newenvironment, 121
\newline, 19
\newpage, 19
\newsavebox, 112
\newtheorem, 71
\noindent, 129
\nolinebreak, 19
\nombre, 28
\nonumber, 66
\nopagebreak, 19
\normalsize, 124
\not, 76
ntheorem, 72
numprint, 28
O
oblivoir, 30
\oddsidemargin, 132
œ, 25
one column, 11
option, 9
optional parameters, 5
OT1, 27
Ottoman, 37
\oval, 111, 113
\overbrace, 57
overfull hbox, 20
\overleftarrow, 58
\overline, 57
\overrightarrow, 58
P
package, 7, 10, 119
packages
amsbsy, 71
amsfonts, 70, 79
amsmath, 53, 59, 60, 68, 69, 71
amssymb, 56, 70, 75
154
INDEX
amsthm, 71, 72
pgfplot, 118
arabxetex, 37
polyglossia, 35–37
babel, 20, 25, 32–35, 116
ppower4, 100
beamer, 100–102, 105
prosper, 100
bicig, 33
pstricks, 109
bidi, 36, 37
pxfonts, 93
bm, 71
showidx, 87
booktabs, 48
syntonly, 12, 15
calc, 131
textcomp, 23
color, 100
tikz, 105, 115, 116
dcolumn, 47
txfonts, 93
doc, 12
verbatim, 6, 89
eepic, 109
xalx, 33
eurosym, 23
xeCJK, 38
exscale, 12
xepersian, 37
fancyhdr, 87–89
xgreek, 36
fontenc, 12, 27, 32
page layout, 131
fontspec, 35, 99
page style, 13
frenchb, 28
empty, 13
geometry, 89
plain, 13
graphicx, 83, 93, 100
hyperref, 36, 91, 93, 94, 97, 98, \pagebreak, 19
100
\pageref, 41, 90
hyphenat, 89
\pagestyle, 13
IEEEtrantools, 64
paper size, 11, 91, 131
\paperheight, 132
ifpdf, 97
ifthen, 12
\paperwidth, 132
indentfirst, 129
\par, 124
inputenc, 12, 26, 32
paragraph, 17
kotex, 30
\paragraph, 39
parameter, 5
latexsym, 12
layout, 131
\parbox, 134
layouts, 132
parbox, 134
longtable, 47
\parindent, 128
makeidx, 12, 86
\parskip, 128
\part, 39
mathrsfs, 79
mathtext, 32
\partial, 59
memoir, 30
partial derivative, 59
mhchem, 70
Pashto, 37
microtype, 100
PDF, 90, 98
ntheorem, 72
pdfLATEX, 92, 100
numprint, 28
pdfLATEX, 91
oblivoir, 30
pdfTEX, 91
pgf, 105, 115, 118
PDFView, 138
INDEX
period, 23
R
\raisebox,
135
Persian, 37
\ref, 41, 50, 90
pgf, 105, 115, 118
\renewcommand, 120
pgfplot, 118
\renewenvironment, 121
\phantom, 51, 70
report class, 10
picture, 105, 106, 109, 110
reserved characters, 5
piecewise function, 67
\right, 60, 67
placement specifier, 49
right-aligned, 43
plain, 13
\right., 60
pmatrix, 68
\rightmark, 87, 89
\pmod, 58
roman, 124
polyglossia, 35–37
\rule, 48, 121, 135, 136
Português, 27
Russian, 36
Portuguese, 27
PostScript, 3, 9, 51, 83, 84, 92, 97, S
100, 106, 137, 140
sans serif, 124
Encapsulated, 83, 93, 139
\savebox, 112
ppower4, 100
Scandinavian letters, 25
\Pr, 58
\scriptscriptstyle, 70
preamble, 7
\scriptsize, 124
prime, 58
\scriptstyle, 70
\printindex, 87
\sec, 58
proc class, 10
\section, 39, 51
\prod, 60
\sectionmark, 89
\selectlanguage, 26
product operator, 60
\setlength, 106, 128, 131
proof, 72
\settodepth, 133
prosper, 100
\settoheight, 133
\protect, 51
\settowidth, 133
\providecommand, 121
\shorthandoff, 116
\ProvidesPackage, 123
showidx, 87
pstricks, 109
\sin,
58
\put, 107–112
Sindhi, 37
pxfonts, 93
single sided, 11
\sinh, 58
Q
slanted, 124
\qbezier, 105, 107, 113
Slash, 22
\qedhere, 73, 74
\slash, 22
slides class, 10
\sloppy, 20
quotation, 44
\small, 124
quotation marks, 21
Small Caps, 124
quote, 44
\smallskip, 130
155
156
INDEX
\smash, 55
space, 4
spacing
math mode, 55
special character, 24
\sqrt, 57
square brackets, 5
square root, 57
\stackrel, 59
\stretch, 121, 129
structure, 7
strut, 48
\subparagraph, 39
subscript, 56
\subsection, 39
\subsectionmark, 89
\substack, 60
\subsubsection, 39
\sum, 60
sum operator, 60
\sup, 58
superscript, 56
syntonly, 12, 15
T
T1, 27, 32
T2*, 32
T2A, 27, 32
T2B, 27
T2C, 27
\tabcolsep, 47
table, 45
table, 49, 50
\tableofcontents, 39
tabular, 45, 134
\tag, 54
\tan, 58
\tanh, 58
\TeX, 21
TeXnicCenter, 139
\texorpdfstring, 97
text style, 53, 55
\textbackslash, 5
\textbf, 124
\textcelsius, 23
textcomp, 23
\textdegree, 23
\texteuro, 23
\textheight, 132
\textit, 124
\textmd, 124
\textnormal, 124
\textrm, 124
\textsc, 124
\textsf, 124
\textsl, 124
\textstyle, 70
\texttt, 124
\textup, 124
\textwidth, 132
\tfrac, 59
thebibliography, 85
\theoremstyle, 71
\thicklines, 108, 111, 113
\thinlines, 111, 113
\thispagestyle, 13
tikz, 105, 115, 116
tikzpicture, 115
tilde, 22, 57
tilde ( ~), 38
\tiny, 124
title, 11, 40
\title, 40
\tnss, 120
\today, 21
\topmargin, 132
\totalheight, 134, 135
Turkish, 37
two column, 11
txfonts, 93
U
\ud, 69
Uighur, 37
umlaut, 25
\underbrace, 57
underfull hbox, 20
INDEX
\underline, 42, 57
XETEX, 98
\unitlength, 106, 108
xgreek, 36
units, 129, 130
Xpdf, 91
upright, 124
Urdu, 37
\usebox, 112
\usepackage, 10, 13, 23, 25–27, 33,
123
\usetikzlibrary, 117
utf8, 26, 34
V
\vdots, 57
\vec, 58
\vector, 108
vectors, 58
\verb, 45
verbatim, 6, 89
verbatim, 45, 89
\verbatiminput, 89
verse, 44
vertical
dots, 57
vertical space, 130
Vmatrix, 68
vmatrix, 68
\vspace, 130
W
whitespace, 4
after commands, 5
at the start of a line, 4
\widehat, 58
\widetilde, 58
\width, 134, 135
Word, 87
WYSIWYG, 2, 3
X
X2, 27
xalx, 33
xeCJK, 38
XELATEX, 98
xepersian, 37
157
Susan Hutchinson
• Please report any equipment faults to us
• Let us know if you have any other concerns
Tripping over bags and coats
• Where is the fire exit?
• Beware of hazards:
LaTex: Document preparation
1
07/02/2017
• The toilets are along the corridor outside the lecture
rooms.
• The rest area has vending machines and a water cooler.
• The seats at the computers are adjustable.
• You can adjust the monitors for height, tilt$$and$$brightness.
2
07/02/2017
LaTeX
2016 - 2017
1 / 55
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
LaTeX
2016 - 2017
Stable for 30 years with a vast and supportive user community.
Powerfully configurable: the language can be extended to your own
specification.
Free and freely available.
3 / 55
A markup language: embedded commands control the appearance of
the output (like HTML).
TEX was designed by Donald Knuth in the late 1970s as a language for
typesetting documents. The main characteristics are
A brief history of TEX
Some history and background
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
2016 - 2017
Department of Statistics, University of Oxford.
Susan Hutchinson
Document Preparation
LaTeX Level 3
LaTeX
2016 - 2017
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
LaTeX
2016 - 2017
More widely used than TEX and what we will be using today.
LATEX works at a higher level than TEX, making it easier to use.
It has many powerful features including tools for creating tables of
contents, bibliographies, cross–references and indexes.
Developed in the 1980s by Leslie Lamport.
So what is LATEX?
Some history and background
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
7 Resources and references
6 Advanced: bibliography, cross references, figures
Exercise: mathematics
5 Mathematics: to infinity and beyond
Exercise: typesetting a text document
4 Basics: text, lists, tables, titles
Exercise: a first document
3 Typesetting a simple document
2 Environment - MiKTEX and Texmaker in Windows
1 Some history and background
Today’s Programme
4 / 55
2 / 55
2016 - 2017
5 / 55
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
LaTeX
2016 - 2017
Easy to customise the build environment.
7 / 55
Good range of editor tools: find and replace, undo, syntax highlighting.
Clear interface for editing, building and viewing LATEX documents.
Texmaker is a friendly IDE for creating LATEX files. It is simple to learn$$and$$easy to install.
MiKTEX and Texmaker
Typesetting a simple document
LaTeX
There is a large and helpful community of TEX users, particularly
amongst mathematicians.
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
But
Extending the system using the macro language is difficult (but
ultimately satisfying).
Many features such as colour and graphics are not standard and so
need to be included explicitly.
Windows users are not used to including markup in documents.
It works on an “edit, typeset, view” cycle. There is no effective or
universally available WYSIWYG interface. You write plain text files.
Why doesn’t everybody use it?
Some history and background
2016 - 2017
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
\end{document}
. . . This bit is called the body . . .
\begin{document}
LaTeX
. . . This bit is called the preamble . . .
\documentclass{article}
2016 - 2017
Note that the text of the document is surrounded by commands.
Goodbye now. That’s it.
\end{document}
\documentclass{article}
\begin{document}
\section{Introduction}
Hello there. This is the first paragraph.
A simple LATEX file
Typesetting a simple document
LaTeX
8 / 55
6 / 55
A LATEX engine or distribution
In Windows the most commonly used distribution is MiKTEX. It
provides all the infrastructure for creating documents such as fonts,
style files, compilation and previewing commands and much else.
Another popular distribution is TEXLive which is widely used in Linux;
Mac users generally use MacTEX.
An editor or IDE (Integrated Development Environment)
This is used to edit, typeset and preview LATEX documents. There are
many editors and IDEs available. Emacs, TeXworks and TeXMaker are
available for Windows, Macs and Linux. Several other
platform-dependent editors are available such as Kile and Lyx in Linux,
TEXnicCenter, WinEDT and Winshell in Windows, and Aquamacs for
Macs. Today, we will be using Texmaker which is available for Linux,
Mac and Windows.
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
2
1
In order to use LATEX two components are needed.
What is needed to run LATEX?
Environment - MiKTEX and Texmaker in Windows
LaTeX
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
The first version
LaTeX
Typesetting a simple document
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
2016 - 2017
2016 - 2017
A separate part of the Texmaker window is used to preview the
document. Each time the document is typeset, reload the PDF.
The file is saved and typeset.
Then to create a printable document the following steps are needed:
11 / 55
9 / 55
Commands, or markup, which change the appearance of some text or
structure the document are embedded in the text.
All the text that is to read is entered in the body of the document.
Packages are used to change the overall appearance of the whole
document and are added to the preamble.
So how does LATEX work?
Typesetting a simple document
LaTeX
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
The second version
LaTeX
Typesetting a simple document
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
2016 - 2017
2016 - 2017
The word This now appears in bold and That’s is emphasised.
12 / 55
10 / 55
Using the parskip package means that paragraphs are separated by a
blank line rather than by an indentation on the first line.
Goodbye now. \emph{That’s} it.
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{parskip}
\begin{document}
\section{Introduction}
Hello there. \textbf{This} is the first paragraph.
So to add a package and change the format of some text in the original
example file use:
An example
Typesetting a simple document
LaTeX
2016 - 2017
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
There are many others.
LaTeX
2016 - 2017
letter for personal letters and includes addresses, date$$and$$signature.
book for book publication.
report for longer technical documents.
article for short documents and articles for publication.
The \documentclass{class} markup includes:
Document classes
Basics: text, lists, tables, titles
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
Remember that LATEX files must end with .tex
Preview it or fix errors.
13 / 55
15 / 55
2016 - 2017
14 / 55
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
LaTeX
2016 - 2017
16 / 55
so \documentclass[a4paper,12pt]{article} would use the article style
and produce output formatted for A4 paper and 12pt type.
twocolumn produces two columns on each page.
twoside formats article and report documents for two–sided
printing. This is the default for book style.
11pt prints the document using eleven-point type rather than the
default of ten-point type; option 12pt uses twelve point type.
A point is a typesetting measurement and is 1/72 of an inch.
a4paper makes the page size suitable for A4 paper.
The standard classes can be modified by options. Options appear in square
brackets [ . . . ] after the \documentclass command.
Class options
LaTeX
Basics: text, lists, tables, titles
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
Anything after % is a comment and is ignored.
Some commands are environments of the form
\begin{xxx} . . . \end{xxx}.
Commands are words (usually) prefixed by \. Some commands have
parameters which are surrounded by { }.
Save the file and typeset it.
&#%_{} The characters Some simple rules Basics: text, lists, tables, titles are special. Put a backslash (\) in front of them if you need the character to appear. Exercise: a first document See if you can find all the buttons suggested in the first exercise. Open the Texmaker application. Now do Exercise 1. Exercise 1 Typesetting a simple document LaTeX Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) LaTeX Sections will be formatted and numbered automatically. \section{Top-level heading} \subsection{2nd-level heading} \subsubsection{3rd-level heading} \paragraph{4th-level heading} \subparagraph{5th-level heading} Section headings Basics: text, lists, tables, titles Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) fancyhdr Allows for complex headers and footers. parskip Leave a blank line between paragraphs. 2016 - 2017 2016 - 2017 amsmath Additional mathematical symbols from the American Mathematical Society. 19 / 55 17 / 55 hyperref Turns cross–references into hyperlinks in PDF documents. graphicx Loads the macros for including external graphics (or picture) files. color Allows coloured text and backgrounds. times Sets the default font to Times Roman. Frequently used packages Basics: text, lists, tables, titles Lesser spotted Warty Enjoy the trip Then go for it Look before you leap 2 1 Frogs Toads Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) 2 1 Lists LaTeX 2016 - 2017 LaTeX 2016 - 2017 \begin{itemize} \item Look before you leap \item Then go for it \item Enjoy the trip \end{itemize} \begin{enumerate} \item Frogs \item Toads \begin{enumerate} \item Lesser spotted \item Warty \end{enumerate} \end{enumerate} Basics: text, lists, tables, titles Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) This will make a title page and a table of contents. \maketitle \tableofcontents 20 / 55 18 / 55 Then add the following to the body, usually just after \begin{documents} \title{Your title} \author{Your name} \date{A date} In the preamble add the following: Titles are easy to include in documents and tables of contents automatically generated from section and subsection headings. Titles Basics: text, lists, tables, titles LaTeX {\bfseries...} {\upshape...} {\itshape...} {\slshape...} {\scshape...} {\em...} {\normalfont...} \textbf{...} \textup{...} \textit{...} \textsl{...} \textsc{...} \emph{...} \textnormal{} LaTeX {\sffamily...} {\ttfamily.} {\mdseries...} \textsf{...} \texttt{...} \textmd{...} Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) {\rmfamily...} Command \textrm{...} or Formatting characters Basics: text, lists, tables, titles Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) is is is is 2016 - 2017 italic shape slanted shape small caps shape emphasized font. Text is default font Text Text Text Text Text is bold series Text is upright shape Text is sans serif family Text is typewriter family Text is medium series Effect Text is roman family 2016 - 2017 Both frogs \footnote{which hop} and toads \footnote{which crawl} are found where I live. which hop b which crawl a Both frogsa and toadsb are found where I live. Footnotes Basics: text, lists, tables, titles 23 / 55 21 / 55 22 / 55 LaTeX Put \\ between each row. 6 Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) Cells on a row are separated by &. Otherwise the width of the column is set automatically. 4 5 An exact width can be set using p{1in}. 2016 - 2017 24 / 55 Each X represents the alignment of column — either l (left), r (right) or c (centre). 3 2 2016 - 2017 The table is enclosed by \begin{tabular}{XXX} and \end{tabular} The tabular environment 1 LaTeX Basics: text, lists, tables, titles Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) A quotation often used in examples is \begin{quote} Now is the time for all good men to come to the aid of the party. \end{quote} Now is the time for all good men to come to the aid of the party. A quotation often used in examples is Quotes Basics: text, lists, tables, titles Vegetable Lettuce Pumpkins Broad beans Planting time March to July June November LaTeX 2016 - 2017 Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) LaTeX 2016 - 2017 \begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|} \hline \multicolumn{2}{|c|}{\emph{Vegetables}} & \emph{Planting time} \\ \hline Beans & Broad & November \\ \cline{2-3} & French & May \\ \hline \multicolumn{2}{|l|} {Beetroot} & March \\ \hline \multicolumn{2}{|l|} {Carrots} & March \\ \hline \multicolumn{2}{|l|} {Courgettes} & June \\ \hline Tomatoes & Beef & May (outdoors) \\ \cline{2-3} & Cherry & April (under glass) \\ \hline \end{tabular} The table source Basics: text, lists, tables, titles Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) \begin{tabular}{|c|l|} \hline Vegetable & Planting time \\ \hline Lettuce & March to July \\ \hline Pumpkins & June \\ \hline Broad beans & November \\ \hline \end{tabular} A simple table Basics: text, lists, tables, titles 27 / 55 25 / 55 Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) 2016 - 2017 LaTeX 2016 - 2017 Exercise: typesetting a text document Now do the set of Exercises in Section 2. Exercise 2 Planting time November May March March June May (outdoors) April (under glass) LaTeX Basics: text, lists, tables, titles Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) Vegetables Beans Broad French Beetroot Carrots Courgettes Tomatoes Beef Cherry A more complicated table Basics: text, lists, tables, titles 28 / 55 26 / 55 1 k=1 k 2 Pn = lim k=1 123 x Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) Fraction: 56 Subscript: a2 Superscript: a2 Simple maths √ LaTeX LaTeX 2016 - 2017 Fraction:\frac{123}{x}$Root:$\sqrt{56}$Subscript:$a_2$Superscript:$a^2$2016 - 2017 $$$\lim_{n \to \infty} \sum_{k=1}^n \frac{1}{k^2} = \frac{\pi^2}{6}$$$ $$\lim_{n \to \infty} \sum_{k=1}^n \frac{1}{k^2} = \frac{\pi^2}{6}$$ Mathematics: to infinity and beyond Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) Root: π2 6 n X 1 π2 = n→∞ k2 6 limn→∞ Inline or Display math? Mathematics: to infinity and beyond 31 / 55 29 / 55 LaTeX $$g(E) = \frac{(E)} (1) + (I)I {E} \frac{!}{E^2}$$ Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) LaTeX y 4 = 2x + z3 $$y^4=2x+z_3$$ q √ 2 z =3 y = 3y 5 + 5 $$z=3\sqrt{\sqrt y^2=3y^5}+5$$ =0 $$\frac{\partial}{\partial y}f{x y}=0$$ ∂ ∂y f xy ~x · ~y = 0 if and only if ~x ⊥ ~y $$\vec{x}\cdot\vec{y}=0 \mbox{ if and only if } \vec{x}\perp\vec{y}$$ a + b = c + d = xy = w /z $$a+b=c+d=xy=w/z$$ More maths Mathematics: to infinity and beyond Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) ! (E ) (I )IE 2 g (E ) = + E Numbered Equations Equations Mathematics: to infinity and beyond 2016 - 2017 2016 - 2017 32 / 55 30 / 55 x [x 2 2 + y 2] 1 1 − x2 Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) 1 1+ 1 − x2 1+ Grouping 3 3 LaTeX \begin{displaymath} 1 + \left[ \frac{1}{ 1-x^{2} } \right] ^3 \end{displaymath} \bigskip \begin{displaymath} 1 + \left( \frac{1}{ 1-x^{2} } \right) ^3 \end{displaymath} Mathematics: to infinity and beyond LaTeX$\underbrace{ a+b\cdots+z }_{26}\overline{m+2}\surd[x^2 + y^2]\sqrt[3]{2}\sqrt{ x^{2}+\sqrt{y} }\sqrt{x}$Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) 26 a| + b{z · · · + z} m+2 √ √ 3 p √ x2 + y √ Roots Mathematics: to infinity and beyond 2016 - 2017 2016 - 2017 35 / 55 33 / 55 π 2 LaTeX 34 / 55 LaTeX$\big\|\Big\|\bigg\|\Bigg\|$2016 - 2017$\big\}\Big\}\bigg\}\bigg\}\Bigg\}$\\ 36 / 55$\Big( (x+1) (x-1) \Big) ^{2}$\\ 2016 - 2017 \begin{displaymath} \sum_{i=1}^{n} \qquad \int_{0}^{\frac{\pi}{2}} \qquad \prod_\epsilon \end{displaymath}$\big(\Big(\bigg(\Bigg($\\ Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) ) o Y Mathematics: to infinity and beyond 2 (x + 1)(x − 1) Bracing 0 Z Susan Hutchinson (Oxford) i=1 n X Sum, integral, prod Mathematics: to infinity and beyond D g (x, y ) dx dy D g (x, y )dxdy LaTeX if d > c today and every day Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)   a b+x y=  l Another array LaTeX 2016 - 2017 \begin{displaymath} y = \left\{ \begin{array}{ll} a & \textrm{if$d>c\$}\\
b+x & \textrm{today}\\
l & \textrm{and every day}
\end{array} \right.
2016 - 2017
\begin{displaymath}
\int\int_{D} g(x,y) \mathrm{d}
x \mathrm{d} y
\end{displaymath}
\begin{displaymath}
\int\!\!\!\int_{D} g(x,y)
\, \mathrm{d} x\, \mathrm{d} y
\end{displaymath}
Mathematics: to infinity and beyond
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
Z Z
ZZ
Sorting out spacing
Mathematics: to infinity and beyond
39 / 55
37 / 55
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
1 2
3 4
Grouping in an array
LaTeX
 \begin{displaymath}
\mathbf{X} =
 \left(

\begin{array}{ccc}
x_{11} & x_{12} & \ldots \\
x_{21} & x_{22} & \ldots \\
\vdots & \vdots & \ddots
\end{array} \right)
\end{displaymath}
LaTeX
\begin{displaymath}
\left(
\begin{array}{c|c}
1 & 2 \\
\hline
3 & 4
\end{array}\right)
\end{displaymath}
Mathematics: to infinity and beyond
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
x11 x12 . . .
 x21 x22 . . .
X=
..
.. . .
.
.
.

Arrays
Mathematics: to infinity and beyond
2016 - 2017
2016 - 2017
40 / 55
38 / 55
Exercise: mathematics
LaTeX
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
LaTeX
2016 - 2017
43 / 55
Just as \tableofcontents will list your sections and subsections at
the beginning of the document, \listoffigures$$and$$\listoftables will list the figures and tables with their captions.
2016 - 2017
42 / 55
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
LaTeX
pdflatex Use JPEG, PDF and PNG format.
dvips Use EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) files.
2016 - 2017
44 / 55
The format of the graphics files you include depends on whether the final
printer-ready output is produced via dvips or pdflatex.
\begin{figure}
\begin{center}
\includegraphics[angle=90,
width=0.5\textwidth]{test}
\end{center}
\end{figure}
Figures and tables are numbered automatically.
LaTeX
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
\begin{figure}
\vspace{3cm}
\caption{This is photograph}
\end{figure}
\begin{table}
...
\caption{This is a table}
\end{table}
41 / 55
Including graphics
2016 - 2017
A \label can follow sections, figures tables, equations and so on. The
numbering is sorted out automatically. When there are cross-references, the
latex command must be run twice to get them sorted out.
\section{Introduction}\label{intro}
Here is the introduction.
We can refer to section \ref{intro}
which is on page \pageref{intro}.
Cross-references
Figures
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
These are all based on typesetting mathematics. If you will not be needing
LATEX for mathematical typesetting then experiment further with some
techniques explained in Chapter 2 of The Not So Short Introduction to
LATEX2e.
Now do the exercises in Section 3.
Exercise 3
Mathematics: to infinity and beyond
2016 - 2017
45 / 55
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
LaTeX
2016 - 2017
47 / 55
LATEX and BibTEX communicate using the .aux file. LATEX tells BibTEX
what it wants done and BibTEX writes a .bbl file which LATEX reads the
next time it is run.
latex test # writes test.aux
latex test # writes test.aux
bibtex test # writes test.aux
latex test # writes test.aux
Running BibTEX
LaTeX
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
scale=nn scale graphic.
angle=nn rotate graphic counterclockwise.
height=xx scale graphic to the height specified.
width=xx scale graphic to the width specified.
Options for graphicx package
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
Now do the exercises in Section 4.
Exercise 4
LaTeX
test.tex
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{natbib}
\begin{document}
In \cite{homer} we see that ...
\bibliographystyle{plain}
\bibliography{myrefs}
\end{document}
myrefs.bib
@author{homer,
author="Homer Simpson",
title="My Favorite Donuts",
journal="Comparative Confectionery",
year="2006",
volume="18",
pages="9-55"}
Susan Hutchinson
(Oxford)
LaTeX
Components of BibTEX
2016 - 2017
2016 - 2017
48 / 55
46 / 55
2016 - 2017
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
LaTeX
2016 - 2017
Textures (commercial) for Macintosh and MacTEX which is free.
VTEX and Y&Y TEX(commercial) for Windows
TEXLive for Linux.
MacTEX for Mac OS.
Distributions
Resources and references
LaTeX
51 / 55
49 / 55
Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Sebastian Rahtz: The LATEX
Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin: The LATEX
Leslie Lamport: LATEX, A document preparation system, 2nd edition,
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
3
2
1
Books
Resources and references
2016 - 2017
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
LaTeX
2016 - 2017
Scientific Word (commercial but site licensed) for Windows.
Aquamacs (free), an emacs–like editor for Macs.
LeD, Winshell and TEXnicCenter for Windows.
Lyx (free) for Linux/Unix and Windows.
TEXworks for Windows, Mac and Unix (including Linux).
Emacs for Linux and Windows.
WinEdt (commercial) for Windows.
Other shells and frontends
Resources and references
LaTeX
Massachusetts, 1986)
52 / 55
50 / 55
Helmut Kopka and Patrick Daly: A Guide to LATEX, Addison Wesley,
3rd Edition 1999
Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz et al.: The LATEX Web Companion,
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
3
2
1
More books
Resources and references
LaTeX
Resources and references
2016 - 2017
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
for more details.
LaTeX
http://wiki.oucs.ox.ac.uk/weblearn/StartPage
2016 - 2017
The IT Services WebLearn Wiki now supports LATEX mathematical
notation. See
Local information
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
55 / 55
53 / 55
The TEX Users Group, http://www.tug.org/, has links to all the TEX
distributions and projects
The Comprehensive TEX Archive Network (CTAN) has all free TEX
packages. See http://www.ctan.org
The TEXLive CD (see http://www.tug.org/texlive) has TEX setups for
Windows, Unix and Linux
Other resources
Resources and references
Susan Hutchinson (Oxford)
Produce bus timetables
Typeset XML directory
Convert to HTML
Make pictures
Typeset music or chess boards
Do Japanese or Hebrew
LaTeX
Other things you can do with LATEX
Resources and references
2016 - 2017
54 / 55